O w n e r's Ma n u a l
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland Percussion Sound
Module TD-6.
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “USING THE
UNIT SAFELY” (p. 2–3) and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 4–5). These
sections provide important information concerning the proper operation
of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a
good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s manual
should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on
hand as a convenient reference.
*
All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyright © 2001 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any
form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
010
101b
•
This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate
for a long period of time at a high volume level,
or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the
ears, you should immediately stop using the
unit, and consult an audiologist.
•
The unit and the AC adaptor should be located
so their location or position does not interfere
with their proper ventilation.
................................................................................................
102d
•
Always grasp only the plug or the body of the
AC adaptor when plugging into, or unplugging
from, an outlet or this unit.
................................................................................................
103b
•
Whenever the unit is to remain unused for an
extended period of time, disconnect the AC
adaptor.
................................................................................................
011
•
Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable
material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind
(water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
................................................................................................
104
•
Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
................................................................................................
012c
•
Immediately turn the power off, remove the AC
adaptor from the outlet, and request servicing
by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page when:
................................................................................................
106
•
Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects
on the unit.
................................................................................................
107d
•
Never handle the AC adaptor body, or its plugs,
with wet hands when plugging into, or
unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
•
•
•
•
The AC adaptor or the power-supply cord
has been damaged; or
Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
The unit has been exposed to rain (or
otherwise has become wet); or
The unit does not appear to operate normally
or exhibits a marked change in performance.
................................................................................................
108b
•
Before moving the unit, disconnect the AC
adaptor and all cords coming from external
devices.
................................................................................................
109b
•
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
................................................................................................
013
•
In households with small children, an adult
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for
the safe operation of the unit.
................................................................................................
110b
•
Whenever you suspect the possibility of
lightning in your area, disconnect the AC
adaptor from the outlet.
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
014
118
•
Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
•
Should you remove screws, make sure to put
them in a safe place out of children's reach, so
there is no chance of them being swallowed
accidentally.
................................................................................................
015
•
Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to
share an outlet with an unreasonable number of
other devices. Be especially careful when using
extension cords—the total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power
rating (watts/ amperes) for the extension cord.
Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the
cord to heat up and eventually melt through.
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
016
•
Before using the unit in a foreign country,
consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
................................................................................................
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPO RTAN T N O TES
291a
In addition to the items listed under “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on page 2–3, please read and observe the
following:
Po w e r Su p p ly
Re p a irs a n d Da ta
301
452
•
Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any
device that will generate line noise (such as an electric
motor or variable lighting system).
•
Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s
memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs.
Important data should always be backed up in another
MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer), or written down on
paper (when possible). During repairs, due care is
taken to avoid the loss of data. However, in certain
cases (such as when circuitry related to memory itself is
out of order), we regret that it may not be possible to
restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data.
302
•
The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long
hours of consecutive use. This is normal, and is not a
cause for concern.
307
•
Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/ or damage to speakers or other devices.
Pla ce m e n t
Me m o ry Ba ck u p
351
501b
•
Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other
equipment containing large power transformers) may
induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change the
orientation of this unit; or move it farther away from
the source of interference.
•
This unit contains a battery which powers the unit’s
memory circuits while the main power is off. When this
battery becomes weak, the message shown below will
appear in the display. Once you see this message, have
the battery replaced with a fresh one as soon as possible
to avoid the loss of all data in memory. To have the
battery replaced, consult with your retailer, the nearest
Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland
352
•
This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
354a
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
•
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
355
•
To avoid possible breakdown, do not use the unit in a
wet area, such as an area exposed to rain or other
moisture.
Ma in te n a n ce
401a
•
For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry
cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with
water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impreg-
nated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards,
be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry
cloth.
402
•
Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/ or
deformation.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPO RTAN T N O TES
Ad d itio n a l Pre ca u tio n s
551
•
Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself
against the risk of loosing important data, we
recommend that you periodically save a backup copy
of important data you have stored in the unit’s memory
in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer).
552
•
Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the
contents of data that was stored in the unit’s memory or
another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer) once it has been
lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data.
553
•
Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its
jacks and connectors. Rough handling can lead to
malfunctions.
554
•
Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
556
•
When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s
internal elements.
558a
•
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the
unit’s volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to
use headphones, so you do not need to be concerned
about those around you (especially when it is late at
night).
558c
•
Since sound vibrations can be transmitted through
floors and walls to a greater degree than expected, take
care not to allow such sound to become a nuisance to
neighbors, especially at night and when using
headphones. Although the drum pads and pedals are
designed so there is a minimal amount of extraneous
sound produced when they’re struck, rubber heads
tend to produce louder sounds compared to mesh
heads. You can effectively reduce much of the
unwanted sound from the pads by switching to mesh
heads.
559a
•
When you need to transport the unit, package it in the
box (including padding) that it came in, if possible.
Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent packaging
materials.
562
•
Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If
using some other make of connection cable, please note
the following precautions.
•
Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to
this unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound
level to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For
information on cable specifications, contact the
manufacturer of the cable.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n te n ts
USING THE UNIT SAFELY ........................................................................2
Contents.....................................................................................................6
Composition of This Manual..................................................................................................14
Terms Used in This Manual ..................................................................................................14
Panel Descriptions..................................................................................16
Front Panel............................................................................................................................16
Rear Panel ............................................................................................................................18
Making the Settings.................................................................................19
Mounting the TD-6 to the Stand ............................................................................................19
Connecting the Pads and the Pedals....................................................................................20
Connecting Two Kick Trigger Units................................................................................... 22
Turning Off the Power ...........................................................................................................25
Trigger Inputs and the Pads You Can Use............................................................................34
Trigger Input Functions........................................................................................................ 34
Combinations of Pad and Trigger Type............................................................................. 35
Recommended Parameters for the Pads ............................................................................ 36
Playing the Pads ...................................................................................................................37
Pad Head Shots and Rim Shots ........................................................................................... 37
Cross Stick............................................................................................................................... 37
Cymbal Bow Shots/ Edge Shots/ Bell Shots....................................................................... 38
Hi-Hat Control Pedal .............................................................................................................39
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n te n ts
Choosing a Drum Kit...............................................................................42
Switching the Click On and Off..............................................................................................43
Adjusting the Click Volume (Level)........................................................................................44
Adjusting the Click Tempo.....................................................................................................45
Choosing a Song and Playing Back......................................................................................46
Choosing a Song .................................................................................................................... 46
Playing Back a Song .............................................................................................................. 47
Adjusting the Song Volume...................................................................................................48
Setting the Backing Part (Melodic Instruments etc.) Volume ......................................... 48
Setting the Drums and Percussion Volume....................................................................... 48
Temporarily Changing the Tempo of a Song ........................................................................49
Muting the Pre-programmed Drums in Songs.......................................................................50
About Drum Kits and the Drum Kit Screen............................................................................56
About the Drum Kits............................................................................................................. 56
About the Drum Kit Screen.................................................................................................. 57
Choosing a Drum Kit ....................................................................(Drum Kit)........................57
Choosing the Pad to Edit.......................................................................................................57
Choosing a Pad by Hitting It ............................................................................................... 57
Notation Used in the Screen .................................................................................................58
Helpful Functions for Edit ......................................................................................................58
Listening the INST (Instrument) assigned to a Pad ...........(Preview)............................ 58
Choosing an Instrument ........................................................................................................59
About the Instruments.......................................................................................................... 59
Choosing from the Group Names.........................................(Inst Group) ....................... 59
Choosing an Instrument .........................................................(Inst).................................... 60
Instrument Settings ......................................................................(INST)..............................60
Adjusting the Volume of the Pad ..........................................(Level)................................. 61
Setting the Pan Position ..........................................................(Pan).................................... 61
Adjusting the Pitch ..................................................................(Pitch).................................. 61
Adjusting the Decay (Length of Sound)...............................(Decay)................................ 61
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n te n ts
Ambience Settings .......................................................................(AMBIENCE) ...................62
Switching Ambience On/ Off.................................................(Ambience Switch)............ 62
Determine the Room Size .......................................................(Room Size)........................ 63
Equalizer Settings ........................................................................(EQUALIZER)..................64
Switching the Equalizer On/ Off............................................. (Master Equalizer Switch).. 64
Adjusting the Sound ...............................................................(High Gain, Low Gain)..... 64
Settings for Various Functions .....................................................(CONTROL) ....................64
Playing a Song by Hitting a Pad............................................(Pad Pattern)...................... 65
Pitch Control
MIDI Note Number for Each Pad .........................................(Note Number).................. 66
MIDI Gate Time for Each Pad ................................................(Gate Time) ........................ 67
Overall Drum Kit Settings.............................................................(COMMON) .....................68
Overall Drum Kit Volume .....................................................(Master Volume) ............... 68
Setting the Range for the Pitch Control
with the Hi-Hat Control Pedal ...................................................... (Pedal Pitch Control Range) ... 68
Naming the Drum Kit .............................................................(Kit Name).......................... 69
Copying a Drum Kit ......................................................................(COPY)............................69
Restoring the Factory Settings for the Edited Drum Kit.................................................. 70
Switching the Order of the Drum Kits...........................................(EXCHANGE)..................70
About the Screen Display......................................................................................................71
Notation Used in the Screen................................................................................................. 71
About the Input Indicator .................................................................................................... 71
Selecting the Pad Type............................................................(Trigger Type).................... 71
Adjusting the Pad Sensitivity ................................................(Sensitivity)........................ 73
Setting the Minimum Levels for the Pads............................(Threshold)......................... 73
Eliminate Crosstalk Between Pads........................................(Crosstalk Cancel)............. 74
Adjusting the Trigger Signal Detection Time......................(Scan Time) ........................ 75
Detecting Trigger Signal Attenuation
and Cancelling Incorrect Triggering.....................................(Retrigger Cancel)............. 75
Setting Rim Sensitivity on the PD-120 and PD-80R............(Rim Sens) .......................... 76
Using the TD-6 with Acoustic Triggers ..................................................................................76
Factory Reset) ...77
Making the Global Settings ..........................................................(UTILITY).........................77
Display Contrast Adjustment ................................................(LCD Contrast).................. 77
Percussion Part Volume Control...........................................(Percussion Part Level)..... 77
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n te n ts
Backing Instruments Volume Control..................................(Backing Level).................. 78
Muting Parts of a Song............................................................(Mute) ................................. 78
Tuning the TD-6.......................................................................(Master Tune) .................... 78
Preview Volume Control........................................................(Preview Velocity) ............ 79
Restoring the Factory Settings.....................................................(Factory Reset)................79
Switching the Click On/Off............................................................(Click) ..............................80
Tempo Adjustment .......................................................................(Tempo)...........................80
Setting the Way the Click Sounds.........................................................................................80
Volume Adjustment ................................................................(Click Level)....................... 80
Setting the Time Signature .....................................................(Time Signature)................ 81
Selecting the Click Sound .......................................................(Inst).................................... 81
Stereo Position..........................................................................(Pan).................................... 81
Inserting a Count Before Playback or Recording ...................(Play Count In, Rec Count In) .. 81
About Songs and the Song Screen.......................................................................................82
About Songs ........................................................................................................................... 82
About the Song Screen .......................................................................................................... 83
Choosing a Song...................................................................................................................84
Choosing from a Category .....................................................(Song Category)................. 84
Choosing a Song ......................................................................(Song).................................. 84
Playing Back a Song .............................................................................................................84
Convenient Function for Playback...................................................................................... 84
Adjusting the Song Volume...................................................................................................85
Muting a Selected Part.................................................................(Part Mute) ......................85
Overall Song Settings...................................................................(COMMON) .....................86
Setting the Tempo....................................................................(Tempo) .............................. 86
Playing Back the Song from the First Note/ Event .............(Quick Play) ....................... 87
Reset Time When Using Tap Playback.................................(Reset Time)....................... 87
Protecting User Song Settings................................................(Song Lock) ........................ 87
Naming a Song.........................................................................(Song Name)...................... 88
Part Settings.................................................................................(PART) ............................88
Choosing Percussion Set and Instruments ..........................(Percussion Set, Inst)......... 89
Adjusting the Part Volume.....................................................(Level)................................. 89
Adjusting the Stereo Position.................................................(Pan).................................... 90
Adjusting the Bend Range......................................................(Bend Range) ..................... 90
Copying a Song............................................................................(COPY)............................90
Deleting a Song............................................................................(DELETE)........................91
Erasing Performance Data in a Song...........................................(ERASE)..........................92
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n te n ts
Preparations for Recording ...................................................................................................93
When Recording Pad Performances ................................................................................... 93
Recording Performances by External MIDI Devices........................................................ 93
How To Record....................................................................................(RECORDING STANDBY)..94
Setting the Time Signature .....................................................(Time Signature)................ 94
Setting the Song Tempo..........................................................(Tempo) .............................. 94
Selecting the Recording Method
(Loop All, Loop1, Loop2, Replace)........................................(Recording Mode)............. 95
Start Recording with a Pad or Pedal Trigger.......................(Hit Pad Start).................... 95
BULK DUMP) .....96
About MIDI ............................................................................................................................96
MIDI Channels and Multi-timbral Sound Modules ......................................................... 96
How the Internal Sequencer Operates................................................................................ 97
Making the MIDI Settings .............................................................(MIDI COMMON).............97
When Using as MIDI Controller
Synchronizing with an External MIDI Device ....................(Sync Mode)....................... 98
Hi-Hat Control Pedal Data Reduction..................................(Pedal Data Thin).............. 99
Switch to the GM (General MIDI) Mode..............................(GM Mode) ...................... 100
Preventing the TD-6 from Switching
to GM (General MIDI) Mode .................................................(Rx GM ON)..................... 100
Mixing MIDI Signals Coming to the MIDI IN
with Real Time Performance on the Pads ............................(Soft Thru)........................ 101
Set the Device ID......................................................................(Device ID)....................... 101
Are Not Transmitted ..................................................(Tx PC Sw) ....................... 102
Are Not Received ........................................................(Rx PC Sw) ....................... 102
MIDI Channel Settings for a Part..................................................(MIDI PART)..................102
MIDI Messages Stop Function for Specific Parts
in GM (General MIDI) Mode .........................................................(GM PART)....................103
Saving Data to an External MIDI Device......................................(BULK DUMP)...............103
Returning Saved Data to the TD-6 .................................................................................... 104
About Transmitting/Receiving Program Changes ...............................................................105
Triggering an External Sound Device by Playing the TD-6.................................................105
Combining with an External MIDI Sequencer......................................................................106
Importing Sequence Data from an External MIDI Device
Recording Your Performance to an External Sequencer................................................ 106
Using the TD-6 As a Sound Module....................................................................................107
1 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n te n ts
No Sound ............................................................................................................................110
Drum Kit Does Not Sound As Intended...............................................................................112
Pad Does Not Sound As Intended ......................................................................................113
Song Does Not Sound As Intended ....................................................................................114
Sound is distorted................................................................................................................114
Problems Operating the TD-6 .............................................................................................115
Display Is Too Light Or Too Dark........................................................................................115
System and Battery Error Messages...................................................................................116
Messages and Error Messages Related to MIDI.................................................................117
Drum Kit List..........................................................................................118
Drum Instrument List ............................................................................120
Preset Song List....................................................................................128
MIDI Implementation .............................................................................135
Specifications........................................................................................152
Index.......................................................................................................153
1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fe a tu re s
Fu ll Pa le tte o f In te rn a l So u n d s fo r All Use s,
fro m Pra ctice to Live Pe rfo rm a n ce
■ Includes 99 Different Drum Kits
You can immediately start playing any of a variety of drum kits, just by selecting the drum kit.
Whether for practice or live performances, these kits can be applied in a wide range of situations.
■ 1, 042 Drum Instruments
You can combine different drum instruments used in a wide range of musical genres to create your
own original drum kits.
■ 150 Different Preset Songs
To get right down to practicing, you merely need to select a Preset song. Then you can play the
drum part just by muting only the Preset song’s drum performance.
You also get 100 internal songs that you can use to record your own drum performances (User
songs).
■ 262 Backing Instruments
The TD-6’s abundance of backing instruments allow you to record in a variety of musical genres.
Rich Ex p re ssio n
You can use the hi-hat control pedal to change the pitch of the pad instruments.
1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fe a tu re s
Fu n ctio n a n d O p e ra tio n s Pe rfe ct fo r Live
Pe rfo rm a n ce s
■ Flat Top Design for Great Visibility
■ Buttons Light for Easy Operation, Even On Stage
■ Large [INC/+] and [DEC/-] Buttons That Can Be Operated Even
with Drum Sticks
Co n ve n ie n t Fu n ctio n s fo r Pra cticin g
■ Includes Part Mute Function for Muting of Specific Parts
Ex p a n d a b ility / Co m p a tib ility
■ Also Compatible With
Pads (PD-5, PD-6, PD-7, PD-9, PD-80, PD-80R, PD-100, PD-120)
Cymbals (CY-6, CY-12H, CY-14C, CY-15R)
Kick Trigger Units (KD-5, KD-7, KD-80, KD-120)
Hi-Hat Control Pedals (FD-7, FD-6; FD-6 is included with TD-6K)
■ Use the TD-6 As a MIDI Sound Module With an External
The TD-6 has a GM mode that can play back GM scores.
This mode includes a function allowing you to mute the sound only of a specified part during
playback of GM scores. This is a very convenient feature for practicing and playing along.
General MIDI (
) System
General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the
limitations of proprietary designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound
generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files that meet the General MIDI
standard bear the General MIDI logo (
).
Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI
sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance.
1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ho w to Use Th is Ma n u a l
Co m p o sitio n o f Th is Ma n u a l Te rm s Use d in Th is Ma n u a l
This owner’s manual is organized as follows.
•
Button names are enclosed in square brackets “[ ],” as in
[KIT] button.
•
•
(p. **) indicates a reference page.
For those using the TD-6 for the first time, this volume explains the
preparations needed for playing sounds, including how to set up
the stand, make pad settings, and turn on the TD-6’s power.
Also provided are explanations of how to combine the TD-6
with other optional pads for fullest utilization of the TD-6’s
features and functions.
Steps in operations may be abbreviated as described
below.
[KIT] ■ [EDIT]
1 . Press [KIT].
2 . Press [EDIT].
[SHIFT] + [KIT]
This contains descriptions explaining how to easily enjoy
performing with the TD-6’s numerous internal drum kits and
Preset songs.
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [KIT].
•
•
The functions of some buttons, such as [EDIT (SETUP)],
change if pressed while [SHIFT] is held down; the
function that is enabled when [SHIFT] is held down is
shown in parentheses.
The TD-6 allows you use the drum kits you like to create new drum
kits and to create songs from recordings of what you play.
This section provides detailed explanations of all of the TD-6’s
functions.
Symbols appearing before the beginning of sentences in
the manual have the following meanings.
These indicate cautionary notes. Be sure to read
them.
Here are the settings used for creating sounds.
These are memos containing information
regarding settings and functions. Read it as
necessary.
• Chapter 2 Functions For Correctly Performing with
This describes the settings you need to make in order to
get the most expression from the TD-6 and pads.
These are useful hints for operation. Read it as
necessary.
Included in this section are settings such as display
contrast and song volume that are applied to the TD-6
as a whole.
These point to reference information. Read it as
necessary.
These are descriptions of terminology. Read it as
necessary.
• Chapters 4–6 Using the sequencer and related
* The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict
what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that
your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system
(e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the
display may not always match what appears in the manual.
Found here are metronome (click) settings, as well as
song performance, recording, editing, and other settings
for sequencers.
• Chapters 7–8 MIDI Settings and Examples of How
This chapter explains how to use MIDI —whether it be
for saving data to an external device, or for using the
TD-6 as a General MIDI sound module.
If you run into problems, refer to “Troubleshooting” to make sure
that the settings are correct. If an error message appears during
operation, refer to “Messages and Error Messages” and take
appropriate action. This section also provides various lists, and the
MIDI implementation charts.
1 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s
Fro n t Pa n e l
fig.P-022
Display
Sequencer Section
The screen displays information, indicating the
•
CLICK (TEMPO) Button
drum kit name, song name, and settings etc.
When you hold down the [SHIFT] button and
press the [CLICK (TEMPO)] button, the
tempo settings screen appears in the display
VOLUME Knob
when headphones are connected, sound will still
be output from the various output jacks.
•
•
REC
Button
Calls up the recording settings screen
STOP
Button
while the song is stopped, this returns you to
the beginning of the song.
•
•
PLAY
Button
pressed when the TD-6 is in recording
PART MUTE Button
1 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s
SONG Button
Editing section
•
EXIT Button
Returns to the previous stage screen. When
pressed a number of times, the display returns
to either the Drum Kit screen or the Song
screen.
KIT Button
•
,
Button
These switch the screen if pressed when “
or “ ” is shown in the display.
”
]
SHIFT Button
Used in conjunction with other buttons.
You can select the trigger input by holding
down the [SHIFT] button and pressing [
Operation
Function
[SHIFT] + [KIT]
Gives a preview of the sound
of the instrument assigned to
or [
In the SONG screen, rewinding and fast
forwarding are carried out in one-measure
[SHIFT] +
•
Selects the trigger input
Deletes or inserts one
character when setting
drum kit names and song
[
], [
]
•
•
•
EDIT (SETUP) Button
Displays the drum kit or song settings screen.
By holding down the [SHIFT] button and
pressing the [EDIT (SETUP)] button, you can
make overall settings for the TD-6.
[SHIFT] +
[CLICK (TEMPO)]
Displays the tempo settings
[SHIFT] +
[EDIT (SETUP)]
For making overall settings for
ENTER
Button
Switches the screen if pressed when “
” is
shown in the display.
[SHIFT] + [SONG]
Displays the volume settings
screen for the backing
instruments (melodic and
INC/+ (Increment) Button,
DEC/- (Decrement) Button
[SHIFT] +
While the song is playing
back, the buttons
These are used to switch drum kits and songs
[PLAY
]
corresponding to the
percussion pad drum tones
and to make changes in the settings values.
•
•
•
•
Pressing the [INC/ +] button increases the
value, and pressing the [DEC/ -] button
decreases the value.
When making an on/ off setting, [INC/ +] will
turn the setting on and [DEC/ -] will turn it
off.
When [SHIFT] is held down and [INC/ +] or
[DEC/ -] is pressed, settings values are then
changed in larger increments or decrements.
When [INC/ +] is held down and then [DEC/ -]
is pressed, settings values increase rapidly;
when [DEC/ +] is held down and then [INC/ -]
is pressed, settings values then decrease
rapidly.
[SHIFT] +
[STOP
Jumps to songs that have not
been used (new User songs)
]
[SHIFT] +
[PART MUTE]
Displays the settings screen
[SHIFT] +
[INC/ +], [DEC/ -]
•
•
•
For making large changes
at a time in the values of
settings
Changes instrument groups
Switches uppercase and
lowercase letters and
symbols when setting
drum kit names and song
1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s
Re a r Pa n e l
fig.P-023
POWER Switch
HH CTRL (Hi-Hat Control) Jack
Connect a hi-hat control pedal (the optional FD-
7 or FD-6; FD-6 is included with the TD-6K) here.
Cord Hook
TRIGGER INPUTS
AC Adaptor Jack
Use these inputs to connect optional pads,
For more detailed information on each trigger
OUTPUT Jacks (L (MONO), R)
Connect these to your amp or audio system. For
Security Slot (
)
MIX IN Jack
http:/ / www.kensington.com/
Connect this to your CD, MD, cassette player, or
The sound that is input to this jack will be output
from the OUTPUT jacks and the PHONES jack.
PHONES Jack
A pair of stereo headphones can be connected to
Even when headphones are connected, sound
will still be output from the output jacks.
MIDI Connectors (IN, OUT/THRU)
Use these connectors when using a MIDI
sequencer, MIDI keyboard, or other MIDI device
to play sounds with the TD-6, when using the
TD-6 and pads to play sounds from an external
MIDI sound generator, or when saving the TD-
6’s settings to, or loading settings from a MIDI
sequencer.
1 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ma k in g th e Se ttin g s
Mo u n tin g th e TD-6 to th e Sta n d
1
Attach the stand holder (included with the optional drum stand) to the
TD-6.
•
When turning the unit
upside-down, get a
bunch of newspapers or
magazines, and place
them under the four
corners or at both ends
to prevent damage to
the buttons and controls.
Also, you should try to
orient the unit so no
buttons or controls get
damaged.
Using the screws attached to the bottom panel, attach the holder so the unit
is oriented as shown in the diagram.
Use the 8 mm screws (M5 x 8) provided with the TD-6. Use of other screws
may result in damage to the unit.
fig.P-009.e
•
When turning the unit
upside-down, handle
with care to avoid
dropping it, or allowing
it to fall or tip over.
Narrow
Wide
2
Attach the TD-6 and stand holder to the drum stand (such as the
To attach the TD-6 to a
cymbal stand or other such
stand, you may want to
use the optional APC-33
All Purpose Clamp to
optional MDS-6, MDS-7U, MDS-8, or MDS-10).
For details on assembling the drum stand and attaching the TD-6, refer to the
owner’s manual for the drum stand.
secure the stand holder. It
can be attached to a pipe of
10.5 mm–30 mm radius.
1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ma k in g th e Se ttin g s
Co n n e ctin g th e Pa d s a n d th e Pe d a ls
Using the provided cables, connect the pads, cymbal pads, hi-hat control
pedal, and kick trigger unit.
Carefully refer to the numbers shown in the illustration and connect to the
appropriate TRIGGER INPUT jacks on the TD-6's rear panel.
Before using pads with
mesh heads (PD-80, PD-
80R, PD-100, PD-120, KD-
80, or KD-120), be sure to
adjust the head tension.
Striking the head when the
head tension is loose may
damage the sensor. For
more information on
Setting Example
fig.P-011.e
TRIGGER INPUT jacks
adjusting the head tension,
refer to the owner’s
manual for each pad.
For fullest performance
expression, make exclusive
use of Roland’s line of
optional pads (PD-5, PD-6,
PD-7, PD-9, PD-80, PD-
80R, PD-100, and PD-120),
cymbals (CY-6, CY-12H,
CY-14C, and CY-15R), and
kick trigger units (KD-7,
KD-80, and KD-120).
2 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ma k in g th e Se ttin g s
■ About Polarity Switch
If you are using the PD-7, PD-9, or KD-7, move the pad’s polarity switch to
the “- (Roland)” position. For more detailed information regarding the
polarity switch, refer to your PD-7, PD-9, or KD-7 owner’s manual.
fig.P-011a.e
POLARITY
+
- (Roland)
■ Connecting Two Pads to Trigger Inputs
5/6 (TOM2/AUX) and 7/8 (TOM3/4)
With the optional cable (PCS-31) or standard insert cable, two pads may be
These trigger inputs do not
handle rim sounds.
connected to the trigger inputs 5/ 6 (TOM2/ AUX) and 7/ 8 (TOM3/ 4).
fig.P-012.e
TD-6 Rear Panel
PD-6
2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ma k in g th e Se ttin g s
■ Connecting Two Kick Trigger Units
When using the KD-7 kick trigger unit (optional), you can connect two KD-7s
When using two KD-7s,
you cannot assign different
instruments to each unit
individually.
together for twin pedal performances.
When connecting two KD-7s with the KD-7’s Mix In jack, the Kick Trigger
signal is slightly weakened. In this case, raise the sensitivity for the trigger
inputs to which the KD-7’s are connected (SETUP/ TRIG BASIC/ Sensitivity;
fig.P-013.e
TD-6 Rear Panel
Output Jack
Mix In Jack
Output Jack
Kick Trigger Units (KD-7)
+
Kick Pedals
2 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ma k in g th e Se ttin g s
Co n n e ctin g He a d p h o n e s, Au d io
Eq u ip m e n t, Am p s, a n d O th e r Ge a r
fig.P-010
R
L
Stereo miniature phone type
CD/MD deck, cassette player, etc.
To prevent the inadvertent
disruption of power to
your unit (should the plug
be pulled out accidentally),
and to avoid applying
undue stress to the AC
adaptor jack, anchor the
power cord using the cord
hook, as shown in the
illustration.
1
Turn off the power of all devices before you make connections.
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always
turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making
any connections.
2
Connect the supplied AC adaptor to the AC adaptor jack.
3
Connect the OUTPUT L(MONO) and R jacks on the rear panel to your
audio system or amp. If using headphones, connect them to the
PHONES jack.
Using the TD-6’s MIX IN
Jack, allows you to play
along with a CD or other
4
Plug the AC adaptor plug into a power outlet.
2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tu rn in g O n / O ff th e Po w e r
Once the connections have been completed (p. 23), turn on power to your
various devices in the order specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order,
you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
fig.P-001
1, 5
3
5
1
This unit is equipped with
a protection circuit. A brief
interval (a few seconds)
after power up is required
before the unit will operate
normally.
Turn the [VOLUME] knob completely to the left to lower the volume to
the minimum level.
2
3
Turn down the volume control on the connected amp or audio system.
Press the [POWER] button to turn on the power.
If the hi-hat control pedal
(the optional FD-7; or for
the TD-6K exclusively, the
FD-6) is pressed when the
power is turned on, control
of the hi-hat’s opening and
closing will not work
Precautions When Turning on the Power
After the power is turned on, the drum kit name (shown in the
following figure) appears in the display; do NOT press any pad
or pedal until [KIT] has lighted.
fig.P-002ai
correctly. Striking the pads
when turning on the
power degrades the pad
response when the pads
are struck lightly.
2 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tu rn in g O n / O ff th e Po w e r
4
5
Turn on the power to the connected amp or audio system.
Caution Concerning
Volume
If the volume levels used
when striking the pads are
left unchanged when
playing back demo songs
or other songs, the volume
may increase suddenly,
which may cause ear pain
and damaged speakers.
Before playing back songs
or patterns, rotate the
[VOLUME] knob
Press [SHIFT] + [KIT] or strike the pad, and while listening to the
sound, gradually bring up [VOLUME] to adjust the volume level.
Also raise the volume level of the connected amp or audio system to the
appropriate level.
No Sound Even When Pressing [SHIFT] + [KIT]
Check the following points.
When Using an Amp or Audio System
counterclockwise to lower
the volume levels, then
readjust to a suitable
volume while listening to
the playback.
•
•
•
•
Is the amp or audio system volume setting correct?
Are the TD-6 and the amp or audio system connected correctly?
Is there a problem with any connector cable?
Have the input select settings of your audio system or amp been
made correctly?
When using headphones:
•
Are the headphones connected to the [PHONES] jack?
Tu rn in g O ff th e Po w e r
1
Completely turn down the volume of the TD-6 and any connected
external devices.
2
Turn off the power to all external devices.
3
Press the TD-6’s [POWER] switch to turn off the power.
2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Re sto rin g th e Fa cto ry Se ttin g s (Fa cto ry Re se t)
This restores the pad and instrument settings, song data, and other
information stored in the TD-6 to the original factory settings.
All data and settings
fig.P-003
stored in the TD-6 are lost
1
2
in carrying out this
operation. Use the “Bulk
Dump” operation to save
crucial data and settings to
an external MIDI device
(SETUP/ BULK DUMP/
4
3, 5, 6
1
While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT (SETUP)].
When [SHIFT] and
[EDIT (SETUP)] lights.
[EDIT (SETUP)] are held
down when the power is
turned on, the display
jumps to the Factory Reset
screen. When carrying out
Factory Reset, read from
fig.P-004ai
2
Press [
] to select “FactoryReset.”
fig.P-005_50
3
Press [ENTER
].
The Factory Reset screen appears.
fig.P-006_50
2 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Re sto rin g th e Fa cto ry Se ttin g s (Fa cto ry Re se t)
4
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the parameter you want to restore to
factory settings.
Here, select “ALL” to restore all of the settings to the original factory
values.
ALL:
All internal settings will be restored to the factory settings.
THIS DRUM KIT:
Only the settings for the currently selected drum kit are restored to
the factory settings.
ALL DRUM KITS:
The settings for all of the TD-6’s internal drum kits are restored to the
factory settings.
ALL SONGS:
All of the TD-6’s internal song data is restored to the factory settings.
5
Press [ENTER
].
The confirmation screen appears.
Press [EXIT] to cancel the
operation.
fig.P-007_50
6
If you’re ready to proceed, press [ENTER
operation will be executed.
], and the Factory Reset
7
When the Factory Reset is finished, the Completed screen appears.
fig.P-008_50
2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Liste n in g to th e De m o So n g s
The TD-6 features four demo songs demonstrating the TD-6’s sounds and
expressive capabilities.
The drums played on the demo songs were played in real time into a
sequencer.
fig.P-029
4 3
1
5
2
1
While holding down [KIT], press [SONG].
The “DEMONSTRATION” screen appears.
fig.P-030_50
•
•
All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use of this
material for purposes
other than private,
personal enjoyment is a
violation of applicable
laws.
No data for the music
that is played will be
output from MIDI OUT.
2 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Liste n in g to th e De m o So n g s
2
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-], or press [
play back.
] or [
] to select the song to
1. CREOLET1
Copyright © 2001, Roland Corporation
Drum kit being used: #72 “RoseWood”
2. CREOLET2
Caution Concerning
Volume
Copyright © 2001, Roland Corporation
Drum kit being used: #20 “Natural”
If the volume levels used
when striking the pads are
left unchanged when
playing back demo songs,
the volume may increase
suddenly, which may
cause ear pain and
3. TC R&B
Copyright © 2001, Roland Corporation
Drum kit being used: #1 “AcuStick’
4. SNAG LTN
Copyright © 2001, Roland Corporation
Drum kit being used: #3 “Groove”
damaged speakers. When
playing back demo songs,
rotate [VOLUME] to the
left (counterclockwise) to
bring the volume level
back down, then while
playing back the song,
readjust the volume to an
appropriate level.
3
Press [PLAY
].
Playback of the demo songs begins, and the four demo songs are played
continuously in sequence.
4
5
When you want to stop the performance, press [STOP ].
When you have finished listening to the demo song, press [KIT],
[SONG] or [EXIT].
2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Se le ctin g th e Pa d Ty p e
Make the settings for the type of pads to be used (trigger type) to ensure that
the TD-6 accurately receives what is being played on the pads.
Set each trigger input as described below.
The following parameters
are automatically set to the
most efficient values for
each pad when you select
the trigger type.
Settings optimized for the TD-6K are provided in factory settings on the
TD-6.
fig.P-014
Basic Trigger Parameters
8
1
•
•
•
Sensitivity
Threshold
TrigCurve
Advanced Trigger
Parameters
(SETUP/TRIG ADVNCD;
•
•
•
•
Scan Time
Retrig Cancel
Mask Time
Rim Sens
For the most suitable
values for each trigger
6
3
2
You may need to adjust
the value since these are
just the reference value.
1
While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT (SETUP)].
[EDIT (SETUP)] lights.
fig.P-015ai
2
Press [
fig.SETUP-BASIC_50 (SETUP-BASIC)
] to select “TRIG BASIC.”
3
Press [ENTER
].
fig.P-016_50
3 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Se le ctin g th e Pa d Ty p e
4
5
Strike the pad you wish to set.
You can also make the
selection by pressing
The setting screen for the struck pad appears.
[SHIFT] + [
] or
[SHIFT] + [
Select).
] (Trigger
Select the most suitable trigger type from the following chart for the
pad you are using.
Pad
Trigger Type
PD7/ 9
Pad
Trigger Type
CY6
PD-5
CY-6
PD-6
PD6
CY-12H
CY-14C
CY-15R
KD-5
CY Type
CY Type
CY Type
KD7
PD-7
PD7/ 9
PD-9
PD7/ 9
PD-80
PD-80R
PD-100
PD-120
PD80/ 100
PD80R
KD-7
KD7
PD80/ 100
PD120
KD-80
KD-120
KD Type
KD Type
6
7
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the trigger type.
These settings apply to
both the head and the rim.
Repeat Steps 4–6 to set the trigger type for each pad.
8
Press [KIT].
[KIT] lights, and the Drum Kit screen appears.
fig.P-017ai
9
Strike the pads and press the pedals to check the following.
• Are sounds being played with all pads and pedals?
• Is the right instrument for each pad being played?
If the correct sound is not being played, check the pad settings once more and
3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ad ju stin g th e Se n sitivity o f th e Pa d
You may wish to adjust the sensitivity of the pads to accommodate your
personal taste and style of performing. Adjusting the TD-6’s sensitivity
The sensitivity setting is
allows you to change the correlation between your playing velocity (strength)
automatically set to the
and the response and volume of the sound.
most efficient values for
fig.P-018
each pad when you select
8
1
Adjust as needed.
6
3
2, 4
1
While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT (SETUP)].
[EDIT (SETUP)] lights.
fig.P-019ai
2
Press [
] to select “TRIG BASIC.”
fig.SETUP-BASIC_50 (SETUP-BASIC)
3
Press [ENTER
].
3 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ad ju stin g th e Se n sitivity o f th e Pa d
4
Press [
] to select “Sensitivity.”
You can also make the
selection by pressing
fig.P-020_50
[SHIFT] + [
] or
[SHIFT] + [
Select).
] (Trigger
5
6
Strike the pad you wish to set.
The setting screen for the struck pad appears.
These settings apply to
both the head and the rim.
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to adjust the sensitivity of the pads.
Here you can make a setting of 1–16.
Higher settings result in higher sensitivity, so that the pad will produce a
loud volume even when struck softly.
Lower settings result in lower sensitivity, so that the pad will produce a low
volume even when struck forcefully.
Setting the Overall Target
Set the sensitivity so that the indicator reaches the maximum position when
you play with your maximum dynamics. A flag, such as shown in the
following, is raised when the indicator reaches the maximum position
(
).
With electronic drum kits,
overall volume is another
important element.
fig.P-020aai.e
Indicator
Listening at low volumes
may make it seem that
there is too little change in
volume, so you might raise
the sensitivity excessively
without really needing to.
In order to make these
settings correctly, adjust
the volume of amps or
headphones to appropriate
levels.
Maximum Indication
Indicator (Maximum)
7
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to make any other necessary pad sensitivity
adjustments.
8
Press [KIT].
[KIT] lights, and the Drum Kit screen appears.
fig.P-021ai
3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ab o u t th e Pa d s
Trig g e r In p u ts a n d th e Pa d s Yo u Ca n Use
Although you can use previous model pads, kick trigger units, and other
such devices with the TD-6, there may be incompatibilities between pads and
trigger inputs, which may prevent you from being able to perform on some
pads.
■ Trigger Input Functions
The following shows the available trigger input functions.
fig.P-024.e
3
2
1
HI-HAT
SNARE
KICK
Head 3
Rim 3
Head 2
Rim 2
Head 1
Use the cable provided
with the pad to connect the
pad to the TD-6. The rim
sound becomes
unavailable when you use
a monaural cable to
connect a pad that is
capable of playing rim
shots and chokes.
11
10
9
7
5
4
RIDE
CRASH2 CRASH1
TOM3
TOM2
TOM1
Head 4
Rim 4
Head 11
Rim 11
Head 10
Rim 10
Head 9
Rim 9
Head 7
Head 5
8
6
TOM4
AUX
Head 8
Head 6
*1
*1
*1: By using an optional cable (the PCS-31) or standard insert cable, you can
use two pads to a single trigger input jack. When using the cable
provided with the pad to connect a single pad, use “Trigger Input 5
(TOM2)” and “Trigger Input 7 (TOM 3)”. For more on how to make the
3 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ab o u t th e Pa d s
■ Combinations of Pad and Trigger Type
To enjoy full use of all the functionality offered by the TD-6 and your pads, be sure to review
the following chart and select the pads best suited for your aims.
fig.P-024a.e
Trigger Input Jacks
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
(KIK) (SNR)
(HH)
(T1)
(T2)
(AUX)
(T3)
(T4)
(CR1) (CR2)
(RD)
KD-5
KD-7
Head
Head
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
KD-80
KD-120
PD-5
Head
Head
Head
PD-6
Head
Head
PD-7
Rim, Choke
Head
O
O
O
O
O
PD-9
Rim, Choke
Head
PD-80
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Head
PD-80R
PD-100
PD-120
Rim
Head
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
Head
Rim
Head (Bow)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
CY-6
Rim (Edge),
Choke
Head (Bow)
CY-12H
CY-14C
Rim (Edge),
Choke
Head (Bow)
Rim (Edge),
Choke
Head (Bow)
CY-15R
Rim (Edge/Bow),
Choke
*1
*2
O:
X:
Can be used.
Cannot be used.
Slash: These trigger inputs do not handle rim sounds.
*1:
*2:
When choking is applied to the CY-15R, you can then play either edge shots or bell
shots.
TRIGGER INPUTS 6 (AUX) and 8 (TOM) can only be used when using an optional
cable (PCS-31) or standard insert cable to connect two pads to one trigger input jack.
For more detailed information, refer to the previous section.
3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ab o u t th e Pa d s
■ Recommended Parameters for the Pads
The trigger parameters (except the Xtalk Cancel) are automatically set to the most efficient
values for each pad when you select the trigger type.
You may need to adjust the value since these are just the reference value. Make settings for
fig.P-024b.e
Basic Trigger Parameters
Advanced Trigger Parameters
Sensitivity Threshold TrigCurve Xtalk Cancel Scan Time Retrig Cancel Mask Time Rim Sens
Pad
KD-5
TrigTyp
KD7
8
8
5
5
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
1
3
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
20
20
20
20
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
20
30
30
30
30
40
40
40
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.6
2.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.5
3.0
3.0
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
8
8
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
4
8
12
KD-7
KD-80
KD-120
PD-5
KD7
10
10
8
KD Type
KD Type
PD7/9
7
PD-6
PD6
8
PD-7
PD7/9
8
PD-9
PD7/9
8
PD-80
PD-80R
PD-100
PD-120
CY-6
PD80/100
PD80R
PD80/100
PD120
CY6
8
11
7
8
9
10
10
10
10
8
CY-12H
CY-14C
CY-15R
CY Type
CY Type
CY Type
Other 1
Other 2
AcDrTrig
8
Others
12
The “Xtalk Cancel (Crosstalk Cancel)” value does not change when the trigger type is
changed. It should be adjusted as necessary to match the actual state of your configuration
•
•
3 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ab o u t th e Pa d s
Pla y in g th e Pa d s
■ Pad Head Shots and Rim Shots
When you perform a head shot, the head instrument is played; rim shots
produce the sound of the rim instrument.
To play a rim shot, you must strike both the head and the rim of the pad
simultaneously.
When using rim shots on
the PD-80R or PD-120,
connect the pad to
TRIGGER INPUT 2
(SNARE).
PD-7, PD-9, PD-80R, PD-120:
Both head and rim shots are available.
PD-5, PD-6, PD-80, PD-100:
Only head shots are available
fig.P-025.e
Head Shot
Rim Shot
Head
Head
Rim
Head
Rim
Head
•
•
When using rim shots
on the PD-80R or PD-
120, connect the pad to
TRIGGER INPUT 2
(SNARE).
The cross stick is also
referred to as a “closed
rim shot.”
■ Cross Stick
When you perform a cross stick, the rim instrument is played.
When using the PD-80R or PD-120 to play the cross stick, be sure that you only
strike the rim (outer edge) of the pad. Placing your hand on the head (center
area) of the pad prevents the cross stick sound from being played properly.
fig.P-025a.e
By selecting the
Rim
instruments with “XS”
after the instrument name,
playing a rim shot
Rim
produces a rim shot tone,
and cross sticking gives a
cross stick tone.
3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ab o u t th e Pa d s
■ Cymbal Bow Shots/Edge Shots/Bell Shots
When you perform a bow shot, the head instrument is played; edge shots and
bell shots produce the sound of the rim instrument.
CY-6, CY-12H, CY-14C:
Capable of bow shots and edge shots.
CY-15R:
In addition to bow shots, either edge shots or bell shots can be played.
When playing edge shots
with the CY-15R, use the
BOW/ EDGE output; for
bell shots, use the BOW/
BELL output.
Bell shots are played by striking the bell with the shoulder of the stick.
fig.P-026.e
Bow Shot
Edge Shot
Bow
Edge
Bell Shot
Bell
CY-15R
3 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ab o u t th e Pa d s
■ Cymbal Choke
By striking a pad and then squeezing the rim portion of the pad, you can
mute the note while the note is still sounding. This performance technique is
known as choking.
fig.P-027.e
Hi-Ha t Co n tro l Pe d a l
By connecting a hi-hat control pedal (the optional FD-7; or for the TD-6K
exclusively, the FD-6), you can obtain consecutive control of the hi-hat’s
opening and closing.
fig.P-028.e
FD-7
Open Hi-Hat:
Strike the hi-hat without pressing the pedal
Closed Hi-Hat:
Strike the hi-hat with the pedal pressed
Foot Open:
Completely press down the pedal
Foot Closed:
Press the pedal and then immediately release it
3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch o o sin g a Dru m Kit
The TD-6 comes with 99 preset drum kits. Now’s probably a good time for
you to try out the drum kits by selecting and playing them.
To see which drum sets
can be selected here, refer
fig.Q-001
1
A drum kit is a collection
of settings that includes
each pad’s instrument
settings, the effect settings,
and other settings. For
A drum kit performance is
recorded in preset song #1
“DRUMS.”
By switching drum kits
during playback of preset
listen to and compare a
variety of different drum
kits.
2
1
Press [KIT].
[KIT] lights, and the “DRUM KIT” screen appears.
fig.Q-002ai
2
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the drum kit.
Pattern Inadvertently Starts Playing When Pad is Struck
Drum kits feature a setting whereby a pad can be struck to start playback of
To see which drum set
using the Pad Pattern
•
To stop the song currently playing:
Press the [STOP ] button on the panel (the [PLAY
] light goes off).
•
To stop the song from playing when the pad is struck:
4 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pla y in g W h ile Liste n in g to th e Me tro n o m e / Click
Sw itch in g th e Click O n a n d O ff
Try using metronome (click).
You can switch the click sound on and off by pressing [CLICK].
You can select the
[CLICK] lights when set to play the sound.
instrument sound and beat
fig.Q-003.e
used for the click.For
Click is played
Click is not played
Lit
Unlit
fig.Q-004a
1
1
Press [CLICK].
[CLICK] lights, and the click sound begins to play.
fig.Q-006
4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pla y in g W h ile Liste n in g to th e Me tro n o m e / Click
Ad ju stin g th e Click Vo lu m e (Le ve l)
fig.Q-004
2
5
4
1, 3
1
Confirm that [EDIT] is not lit.
If [EDIT] lights, you can press [KIT] or [SONG] to turn it off.
fig.Q-005
2
Press [CLICK].
[CLICK] lights, and the click sound begins to play.
fig.Q-006
3
Press [EDIT].
[EDIT] lights, and the click volume settings screen appears.
fig.Q-007_50
4
5
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the volume.
When you finish making settings, press [EXIT] to end the procedure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 4
Pla y in g W h ile Liste n in g to th e Me tro n o m e / Click
Ad ju stin g th e Click Te m p o
fig.Q-008
1
2
4
3
1
Press [CLICK].
[CLICK] lights, and the click sound begins to play.
fig.Q-006
2
While holding down [SHIFT], press [CLICK (TEMPO)].
The Tempo screen appears.
fig.Q-009_50
3
4
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the tempo.
When you finish making settings, press [EXIT] to end the procedure.
The “Tempo” screen is removed from the display.
4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pla y in g Alo n g w ith So n g s
Ch o o sin g a So n g a n d Pla y in g Ba ck
The TD-6 features a sequencer that can record and play back accompaniment
tracks and drum performances.
You can record songs
yourself. For details, refer
This sequencer comes loaded with 150 Preset (internal) songs.
fig.Q-010
4
3
1
The song stops suddenly
when playing the pads:
Striking the pad set the
pad pattern function while
a song is playing back will
cause song playback to
switch to the newly
selected song. Some
“songs” are very short, a
few notes, or even one
chord. So “sudden” stops
can be caused by
accidently triggering one
of these short songs.
For more on this function,
2
■ Choosing a Song
1
Press [SONG].
[SONG] lights, and the SONG screen appears.
To see which songs can be
selected here, refer to
fig.Q-011ai
By holding down [SHIFT]
and pressing [INC/ +] or
[DEC/ -], you can select the
song category.
2
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the song.
4 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pla y in g Alo n g w ith So n g s
■ Playing Back a Song
3
Press the [PLAY
] button, and the song will begin playing.
[PLAY ] lights.
fig.Q-012
4
To stop playback of the song, press [STOP ].
The [PLAY ] light goes out.
fig.Q-013
When playback of a song is stopped, you can do the following.
•
•
•
Pressing [STOP ], returns you to the beginning of the song.
Pressing [
Pressing [
], advances you to the next measure.
], returns you to the previous measure.
Convenient Function for Playback
When playing back a Preset song, you can have the buttons corresponding to
the drums being played light up.
You can also have the buttons light even when drum tones are muted,
making this convenient for practicing with the Preset songs.
This function cannot be
used with songs in which
drum performances are
recorded to the drum kit
part. (The performance of
the preset song #1
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [PLAY
].
Playback of the song begins, and the buttons corresponding to the
performance of the percussion part drums light up.
Hi-Hat
High Tom
Mid Tom
Low Tom
“DRUMS” is recorded to
the drum kit part.)
Snare
Cymbals
Kick
2 . To stop the playback, press [STOP ].
4 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pla y in g Alo n g w ith So n g s
Ad ju stin g th e So n g Vo lu m e
You can adjust the song volume to correct the drum kit volume balance.
Song volume consists of the two following adjustments.
Backing Volume:
The volume set here is
applied to all songs.
Adjusts the volume of melodic instruments etc. other than percussion.
Percussion Part Volume:
Adjusts the volume of the drums and percussion sounds.
fig.Q-016
5
1
3
2, 4
■
Setting the Backing Part (Melodic Instruments etc.) Volume
•
•
The volume balance
among the parts is
adjusted in the “Level”
Here, adjust the volume
of the percussion part.
Although drum
1
While holding down [SHIFT], press [SONG].
The screen for setting the volume level of the melodic instruments etc. appears.
fig.Q-018_50
performances in the
Preset songs are
recorded to the
2
percussion part (except
for preset song #1
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the volume.
“DRUMS”), when you
create your own songs,
what you play on the
pads is recorded to the
drum kit part. The
volume level of the
drum kit part is adjusted
in the “MasterVolume”
(Master Volume) (KIT/
COMMON/
■ Setting the Drums and Percussion Volume
3
Press [
].
The screen for setting the volume level of the drums and percussion appears.
fig.Q-017_50
4 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pla y in g Alo n g w ith So n g s
4
5
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the volume.
When you finish making settings, press [SONG] to end the procedure.
Te m p o ra rily Ch a n g in g th e Te m p o o f a So n g
You can temporarily change the tempo of a song while playback is in
progress. The song returns to its preset tempo when a different song is
selected.
fig.Q-014
1
3
2
1
While holding down [SHIFT], press [CLICK (TEMPO)].
The Tempo settings screen appears.
fig.Q-015_50
2
3
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the tempo.
When you finish making settings, press [EXIT] to end the procedure.
4 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pla y in g Alo n g w ith So n g s
Mu tin g th e Pre -p ro g ra m m e d Dru m s in So n g s
You can mute just the drums recorded in a song. So you can play along.
Try this using Song #8, “URBAN.”
fig.Q-019
Part Mute settings remain
in effect even when the
song is switched.
3
1
Note numbers for muted
drum sounds are
predetermined and cannot
be changed.
mute note numbers.
4, 5
2
1
Press [SONG].
[SONG] lights, and the SONG screen appears.
fig.Q-020ai
2
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select Song #8.
fig.Q-021_50
5 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pla y in g Alo n g w ith So n g s
3
Press the [PLAY
] button, and the song will begin playing.
[PLAY ] lights.
fig.Q-022
4
Press [PART MUTE].
[PART MUTE] lights, and the drum sound are muted.
fig.Q-023
At the factory settings,
pressing [PART MUTE]
mutes only percussion part
drum tones.
5
To hear the drums, press [PART MUTE] once more.
The [PART MUTE] light goes out.
By pressing [SHIFT] +
[PART MUTE], you can
change the part to be
muted (SETUP/ UTILITY/
fig.Q-023a
5 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usin g th e Pa d s to Pla y So n g s
The pads can also be set so that they start the performance of songs when
struck (Pad Pattern function).
This function is available only with electronic drums.
The Pad Pattern function is already selected in Drum Kit #14, “1ManBand.”
Use this kit to try out this function.
•
Make the following
settings when selecting
the Pad Pattern function
yourself.
fig.Q-024
“Pad Ptn (Pad Pattern)”
(KIT/ CONTROL/ Pad
Velo (Pad Pattern
Velocity)” (KIT/
1
CONTROL/ Pad Ptn
)
•
The following are
auxiliary functions
available when you use
songs in which Tap
Playback or One Shot
Playback is specified.
“Quick Play”
(SONG/ COMMON/
“Reset Time”
(SONG/ COMMON/
“Tap Exc Sw (Tap
Exclusive Switch”
(SONG/ COMMON/
2
The following drum kits
use the Pad Pattern
function.
1
Press [KIT].
[KIT] lights, and the “DRUM KIT” screen appears.
fig.Q-025ai
•
•
•
#13 “Syn&Bass”
#18 “DrumSolo”
#97 “Tabla”
kits.
2
Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select Drum Kit #14.
fig.Q-026_50
3
Playback of the song begins when the following pads are struck.
1 KICK: You can play the bass-line note by note (step by step) with your kick drum.
9 CRASH1 Rim: The chords progress when you strike the pad.
5 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pla y in g w ith a CD, Ta p e , o r MD (Usin g MIX IN Ja ck )
Using the TD-6’s MIX IN jack allows you to play along with a CD or other
external audio sources.
To prevent malfunction
and/ or damage to
1
speakers or other devices,
Make the connections as shown in the following figure.
always turn down the
fig.Q-027.e
volume, and turn off the
Headphones,
audio equipment, amp, etc.
CD/MD deck,
cassette player, etc.
power on all devices
before making any
connections.
OUTPUT jack
Use the plug that
matches the device
you are listening with.
Stereo miniature phone type
MIX IN jack
TD-6
2
When you begin playback of the CD deck or other device, the
performance is then audible through the headphones, audio
equipment, amp, or other device.
Adjust the volume level of
the playback device when
correcting the volume
balance between the CD or
other sound input and the
drum kit.
5 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usin g th e TD-6 As a Ge n e ra l MIDI So u n d
Mo d u le
The TD-6 features GM mode, allowing it to play back GM scores (music data
for GM sound generators) from an External Sequencer. The TD-6 has a
function that lets you mute only the drum sounds in GM mode, making this
The TD-6 can also be used
•
•
•
The TD-6 functions as a 16-part multi-timbre sound module.
The internal sequencer is disabled.
Drum kit parts cannot be played using MIDI messages sent from an
external device. They can be played only by playing pads connected
to the TD-6.
5 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit
(Kit Ed it)
Pa ra m e te rs Th a t Ca n Be Se t He re
fig.01-001.e
You can restore drum kits with changed settings to their
KIT
INST (Instrument Settings) (p. 60)
fig.01-002.e
Inst
Level
Pan
Drum Kit #99
Pitch
Decay
Drum Kit #1
Pad Settings
AMBIENCE (Ambience Settings) (p. 62)
Ambience Switch
Ambience Send Level
Studio Type
KICK
SNARE
Head2
Rim2
HI-HAT
Head3
Rim3
TOM1
Head4
Rim4
Head1
Wall Type
Room Size
TOM2
AUX
TOM3
TOM4
Ambience Level
Head5
Head6
Head7
Head8
EQUALIZER (Equalizer Settings) (p. 64)
Master Equalizer Switch
High Gain
CRASH1 CRASH2
RIDE
Head11
Rim11
Head9
Rim9
Head10
Rim10
Low Gain
CONTROL (Settings for Various Functions) (p. 64)
Pad Pattern
Instrument Settings
Inst, Level, Pan, Pitch, Decay
Pad Pattern Velocity
Pitch Control Assign
Note Number
Settings for Various Functions
Pad Pattern Function Settings,
Pitch Control Function Settings,
MIDI Note Number,
Gate Time
COMMON (Overall Drum Kit Settings) (p. 68)
MIDI Gate Time
Master Volume
Pedal Hi-Hat Volume
Pitch Control Range
Drum Kit Name
Ambience Settings
On/ Off, Performance Space, Wall Surface,
Room Size, Amount of Ambience
COPY (Copying Drum Kits) (p. 69)
EXCHANGE (Exchanging Drum Kits) (p. 70)
Equalizer Settings
On/ Off, High Gain, Low Gain
Ab o u t Dru m Kits a n d th e Dru m
Kit Scre e n
Overall Drum Kit Settings
Overall Drum Kit Volume, Drum Kit Name,
Hi-Hat Control Pedal
Ab o u t th e Dru m Kits
A drum kit is a collection of settings, including how each
pad’s sound is played, effects settings, hi-hat control pedal
settings, etc.
•
•
There are 99 drum kits altogether.
You can change the drum kits you like to create new
drum kits.
•
Changed settings are saved automatically.
5 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
Ab o u t th e Dru m Kit Scre e n
The screen displayed when [KIT] is pressed is referred to as
Ch o o sin g a Dru m Kit (Dru m Kit)
When a drum kit is selected, each pad’s settings, ambience, EQ
settings, etc. are switched.
the Drum Kit screen.
fig.01-003ai
4
To see what drum kits are provided with the factory settings,
1 . Press [KIT].
1
2
3
[KIT] lights, and the Drum Kit screen appears.
fig.01-004_50
1 Dru m Kit N u m b e r
Displays the number of the currently selected drum kit.
2 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the drum kit.
2 Dru m Kit N a m e
The name of the currently selected drum kit is displayed.
Dru m Kit: 1 –9 9
3 Cu rre n tly Se le cte d Pa d
The trigger input number for the selected pad is indicated.
Ch o o sin g th e Pa d to Ed it
“
” appears when a head is selected, and “ ” appears
The following two methods can be used for selecting the pad
for which you want to make settings.
when the rim is selected.
Ch o o sin g a Pa d b y Hittin g It
1 . Press [KIT], then [EDIT].
4 GM Mo d e O n / O ff
[KIT] and [EDIT] light.
fig.KIT-INST_50
While in GM mode, “
” appears in the screen.
Otherwise, in normal mode, nothing is indicated. For more
2 . Press [ENTER
].
GM Mode is normally off when the power is turned on.
3 . Strike the pad to be set.
The setting screen for the struck pad appears.
fig.01-006ai.e
Trigger input number
of the struck pad
You can make settings preventing the display from switching
to the instrument’s settings screen even when the pad is
struck. When the TD-6 is set so that the screen does not switch,
the trigger input number appears in brackets ([ ]). For more
fig.01-007ai
5 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
Ch o o sin g o n th e TD-6
N o ta tio n Use d in th e Scre e n
1 . Press [KIT], then [EDIT].
Trigger input numbers and names are indicated in instrument
[KIT] and [EDIT] light.
fig.KIT-INST_50
settings screens.
fig.KIT-INST_50
2 . Press [ENTER
].
Screen
KIK
SNR
HH
Name
KICK
Screen
T3
Name
The instrument selection screen appears.
fig.01-008_50
TOM3
SNARE
HI-HAT
TOM1
TOM2
AUX
T4
TOM4
CR1
CR2
RD
CRASH1
CRASH2
RIDE
3 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [
] or [
] to
T1
select the trigger input number for the pad
being set.
T2
AUX
The trigger input number being selected for the set pad is
indicated in the upper right of the screen.
The trigger input numbers are shown in the following
sequence.
He lp fu l Fu n ctio n s fo r Ed it
H01 ■ H02 ■ R02 ■ H03 ■ R03 ■ H04 ■ R04 ■ H05 ■
H06 ■ H07 ■ H08 ■ H09 ■ R09 ■ H10 ■ R10 ■ H11 ■
R11
Liste n in g th e IN ST (In stru m e n t)
a ssig n e d to a Pa d (Pre vie w )
fig.01-009ai.e
Selecting the Trigger Input Number
Even when no pad is connected to the TD-6, you can select
trigger input numbers and make settings while checking out
instrument sounds.
The preview velocity is set in “Preview Velo (Preview
•
•
Settings screens for trigger inputs to which no pad is
connected and for rim trigger inputs for which the
connected pads are not capable of producing rim sounds
are also displayed.
1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [
] or [
] to
select the trigger input number.
The trigger input number for the selected pad is indicated
in the upper right of the screen.
Trigger Inputs 6 (AUX) and 8 (TOM4) can be used only
when two pads are connected to Trigger Input jacks 5/ 6
2 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [KIT]
You can preview instruments.
5 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
Lo ck in g th e Se ttin g Scre e n W h ile
Ed itin g O n e In stru m e n t (N o te Ch a se )
Ch o o sin g a n In stru m e n t
Note Chase is a function in which a pad is selected either by
striking the pad or when MIDI data corresponding to that pad
is received. The display automatically switches to the settings
screen when the pad settings are made.
Ab o u t th e In stru m e n ts
The TD-6 features 1,024 different instruments which are
categorized into 13 separate groups, such as KICK, SNARE,
and TOM.
To prevent the settings screen from switching if you happen to
tap or touch other pads while making settings, set this to
“OFF.”
You can individually adjust the Level, Pan, Pitch, and Decay
settings for instruments set to the pads.
If you want to set other pads with this setting remaining at
“OFF,” you can switch settings screens by holding down
Ch o o sin g fro m th e Gro u p N a m e s
(In st Gro u p )
[SHIFT] and pressing [
number.
] or [
] to select the trigger input
Find and select instruments from the Group names.
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT
(SETUP)].
To see which instrument groups can be selected here, refer to
[EDIT] lights.
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
2 . Press [
fig.SETUP-MIDICMN_50
] to select “MIDI COMMON.”
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
2 . Press [KIT], then [EDIT].
[KIT] and [EDIT] light.
fig.KIT-INST_50
3 . Press [ENTER
fig.01-010_50
].
3 . Press [ENTER
].
4 . Press [DEC/-] to select “OFF.”
4 . Strike the pad you wish to set.
Even when another pad is struck, the pad settings screen
The setting screen for the struck pad appears.
is prevented from switching.
fig.01-012ai.e
fig.01-011_50
Trigger Input
Number
Instrument Group
5 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] to
end the procedure.
Instrument Number
Instrument Name
When “Note Chase” is set to “OFF,” the trigger input
5 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [INC/+] or [DEC/-]
number appears in brackets ([ ]).
fig.01-011aai.e
to select the instrument group.
In st Gro u p :
KICK, SN ARE, TO M, HI-HAT, CRASH, RIDE,
PERC, SPECIAL, MELO DIC, VO ICES, REVERSE,
FIXED HI-HAT, O FF
5 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
Ch o o sin g a n In stru m e n t (In st)
Select the instrument you want to sound when the pad is
struck.
In stru m e n t Se ttin g s (IN ST)
You can each adjust the Level, Pan, Pitch, and Decay settings
for each instruments assigned to a pad.
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
2 . Press [KIT], then [EDIT].
[KIT] and [EDIT] light.
fig.KIT-INST_50
No sound is played if the pads are struck when the instrument
is set to “1024 OFF.”
3 . Press [ENTER
].
•
•
When the “HI-HAT” instrument group is selected for a
pad, you can then use a hi-hat control pedal (the optional
FD-7; or for the TD-6K exclusively, the FD-6) to control
the opening and closing of the hi-hat.
4 . Press [
] or [
] to select the parameter to be
set.
fig.01-015ai.e
When the hi-hat control pedal (the optional FD-7; or for
the TD-6K exclusively, the FD-6) is pressed, the pedal hi-
hat tone automatically switches according to the
instrument set for the Trigger Input 3 (HI-HAT) head.
The closed hi-hat (foot) can not be changed separately.
Parameter to set
5 . Strike the pad you wish to set.
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
The setting screen for the struck pad appears.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
6 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.01-016ai.e
2 . Press [KIT], then [EDIT].
[KIT] and [EDIT] light.
fig.KIT-INST_50
Value
7 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] to
3 . Press [ENTER
].
end the procedure.
4 . Strike the pad you wish to set.
The setting screen for the struck pad appears.
fig.01-012ai.e
Trigger Input
Number
Instrument Group
Instrument Number
Instrument Name
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the
instrument.
You can select the instrument group by holding down
In st: 1 –1 0 2 4
6 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
Ad ju stin g th e Vo lu m e o f th e Pa d (Le ve l)
Ad ju stin g th e Pitch (Pitch )
Adjusts the volume of the instrument. Raising the value will
increase the volume. With a setting of “0,” no sound is
produced.
Adjusts the pitch of the instrument. The pitch is raised the
higher the value is set. When set to “0,” the sound is played at
the instrument’s default value.
Make the adjustment here when correcting the volume
balance between instruments.
For some instruments, raising or lowering the value beyond a
certain point may not produce further change.
The pedal hi-hat volume is set in “Pedal HH Vol (Pedal Hi-
fig.01-019_50
fig.01-017_50
Pitch : -4 8 0 –+4 8 0
Le ve l: 0 –1 2 7
Ad ju stin g th e De ca y (Le n g th o f
So u n d ) (De ca y )
Adjusts the decay of the instrument’s sound. Higher settings
will result in a longer decay time. When set to “0,” the sound
is played at the instrument’s default value.
Se ttin g th e Pa n Po sitio n (Pa n )
This adjusts the instrument’s pan setting (the perceived
position of the sound between left and right speakers).
•
Pan settings apply to both the head and rim. The rim
settings value appears in parentheses. If either the head
or rim settings are changed, the settings for the other are
changed automatically.
For some instruments, raising or lowering the value beyond a
certain point may not produce further change.
fig.01-020.e
Volume
fig.01-017a_50
•
This setting is applied only when connected in stereo.
Time
-31
0
+31
Decay
fig.01-018_50
fig.01-021_50
Pa n : L1 5 –CEN TER–R1 5 , RAN DO M, ALTERN ATE
L15:
Sound is positioned at the extreme left.
Sound is positioned in the center.
Sound is positioned at the extreme right.
The panning changes randomly each time the
pad is struck.
De ca y : -3 1 –+3 1
CENTER:
R15:
RANDOM:
ALTERNATE: The panning alternately switches between left
and right each time the pad is struck.
6 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
Am b ie n ce “ Se n d ” Le ve l fo r Ea ch
In stru m e n t (Am b ie n ce Se n d Le ve l)
You can adjust the ambience level for each instrument
individually. The ambience effect deepens the higher the
value is set. When set to “0,” no ambience is applied.
Strike a pad to select it, then make the setting.
Am b ie n ce Se ttin g s (AMBIEN CE)
Here you can choose (on a per drum kit basis) the location,
room size, wall material, etc.
1 . Press [KIT], then [EDIT].
[KIT] and [EDIT] light.
2 . Press [
fig.KIT-AMB_50
] to select “AMBIENCE.”
The entire drum kit’s overall ambience depth is set in “Amb
3 . Press [ENTER
].
] to select the parameter you
fig.01-025_50
4 . Press [
] or [
wish to edit.
fig.01-022ai.e
Am b Se n d Le ve l (Am b ie n ce Se n d Le ve l):0 –1 2 7
Parameter to set
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.01-023ai.e
Ch o o se “ Lo ca tio n ” W h e re th e
Dru m s a re Pla y e d (Stu d io Ty p e )
The TD-6 includes nine different internal Studio Types you
can select for the drum “location.” Before you make detailed
settings, use this setting to select the basic type of acoustic
environment in which you will be playing.
Value
6 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] to
end the procedure.
fig.01-026_50
Sw itch in g Am b ie n ce O n / O ff
(Am b ie n ce Sw itch )
Stu d io (Stu d io Ty p e ):
This switches the ambience on and off.
LIVIN G (Livin g Ro o m ), BATHRO O M,
STUDIO (Re co rd in g Stu d io ), GARAGE,
LO CKER (Lo ck e r Ro o m ), THEATER, CAVE,
GYM (Gy m n a siu m ),
fig.01-024_50
STADIUM (Do m e d Sta d iu m )
Am b ie n ce Sw (Am b ie n ce Sw itch ): O FF, O N
6 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
Ch a n g in g th e W a ll Su rfa ce
Ma te ria l (W a ll Ty p e )
Ad ju stin g th e En tire Dru m Kit’s
O ve ra ll Am b ie n ce (Am b ie n ce Le ve l)
Select the surface material of the walls in the room in which
the drums are played.
Adjusts the amount of overall ambience level used for each
drum kit. The ambience effect deepens the higher the value is
set. When set to “0,” no ambience is applied.
fig.01-027_50
The ambience level for each individual instrument is set in
“Amb Snd Lvl (Ambience Send Level)” (KIT/ AMBIENCE/
W a llTy p e (W a ll Ty p e ): W O O D, PLASTER, GLASS
WOOD:
fig.01-029_50
Simulates the sound of a wood-walled room producing a
warm sound.
PLASTER:
Simulates a plaster-walled room producing a more “naturally
Am b Le ve l (Am b ie n ce Le ve l): 0 –1 2 7
live” sound.
GLASS:
Simulates a glass-walled room producing a very bright
ambience.
De te rm in e th e Ro o m Size (Ro o m Size )
Select the size the room in which the drums are played.
fig.01-028_50
Ro o m Size : SMALL, MEDIUM, LARGE
Ambience
Send Level
Ambience
x 17
Studio
Drum Kit
Wall Type
Room Size
Amb Level
Master
Volume
Level
Head x 11
Pan
Equalizer
x 17
Rim x 6
x 17
High Gain
Low Gain
Ambience
Send Level
x 4
Part
Level
Pan
Part1–4
x 4
x 4
Ambience
Send Level
Level
Percussion
6 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
Ad ju stin g th e So u n d (Hig h Ga in ,
Lo w Ga in )
Set the amount of boost or cut (GAIN) in the high frequencies
(HIGH) and low frequencies (LOW). Raise to boost the sound,
lower to cut. The equalizer has no effect when “GAIN” is set
to “0.”
Eq u a lize r Se ttin g s (EQ UALIZER)
A two-band equalizer (for high and low frequency ranges) is
used to adjust the sound of each drum kit.
An equalizer lets you boost or cut specified frequency ranges
to adjust the tone. You can make separate settings for the
amount of boost or cut (the gain) in the high-frequency and
low-frequency ranges.
fig.01-033_50 (KIT EDIT-HighGain)
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
2 . Press [KIT], then [EDIT].
Hig h Ga in : -1 2 d B–+1 2 d B
[KIT] and [EDIT] light.
3 . Press [
fig.KIT-EQ_50
] to select “EQUALIZER.”
fig.01-034_50 (KIT EDIT-LowGain)
Lo w Ga in : -1 2 d B–+1 2 d B
4 . Press [ENTER
].
] to select the parameter you
5 . Press [
] or [
Se ttin g s fo r Va rio u s Fu n ctio n s
(CO N TRO L)
wish to edit.
fig.01-030ai.e
These are settings for a variety of different features, such as
one that lets you start a song by striking a pad (Pad Pattern
settings.
Parameter to set
6 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.01-031ai.e
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
Value
2 . Press [KIT], then [EDIT].
7 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] to
[KIT] and [EDIT] light.
end the procedure.
3 . Press [ ] to select “CONTROL.”
fig.KIT-CTRL_50 (KIT EDIT-CTRL)
Sw itch in g th e Eq u a lize r O n / O ff
(Ma ste r Eq u a lize r Sw itch )
Switches the equalizer on and off.
4 . Press [ENTER
].
] to select the parameter you
5 . Press [
] or [
fig.01-032_50
wish to edit.
fig.01-035ai.e
Ma ste r EQ Sw (Ma ste r Eq u a lize r Sw itch ):
O FF, O N
Parameter to set
6 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
•
•
•
You can select the song Category by holding down
[SHIFT] and pressing [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -].
You can preview a song by holding down [SHIFT] and
pressing [KIT].
6 . Strike the pad you wish to set.
The setting screen for the struck pad appears.
7 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.01-036ai.e
To prevent the sound of an instrument assigned to a pad
from playing, set the instrument’s “Level” to “0” (KIT/
•
•
You can get a stronger response when striking the pads
by playing back with the song’s velocity changed (KIT/
Value
8 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] to
The TD-6 features auxiliary functions for songs set to One
Shot Playback and Tap Playback.
end the procedure.
For more details, refer to
Pla y in g a So n g b y Hittin g a Pa d
(Pa d Pa tte rn )
The Pad Pattern function is a feature that lets you start the
performance of pre-specified songs by striking the pads. This
function provides a very convenient way to use songs during
a live performance or when practicing.
and “Tap Exc Sw (Tap Exclusive Switch)” (SONG/
fig.01-037ai.e
Play Type
Song Number
The Song Set “LOOP” or “ONE SHOT”
LOOP: After the song is played back all the way to the end,
playback then repeats, starting at the beginning of the song.
ONE SHOT: Playback stops once the end of the song is
reached. Each time the pad is struck returns you to the
beginning of the song and starts playback.
Song Name
Pa d Ptn (Pa d Pa tte rn ): O FF, 1 –2 5 0
When triggering/ playing a song that is set to “LOOP” or
“ONE SHOT” mode, if you trigger another song (from a pad,
also in “LOOP” or “ONE SHOT” mode then the last song
played will have priority. Don't forget that some “songs” are
very short, a few notes, or even one chord. So “sudden” stops
can be caused by accidently triggering one of these short
songs. Always check your Pad Pattern settings.
If you have switched a song whose instrument settings are
different, the sound may be interrupted for an instant.
The Song Set “Tap”
Co n tro l th e “ Le ve l” o f th e Pa tte rn
w ith Pla y in g Dy n a m ics (Pa d
Pa tte rn Ve lo city )
When performing with the Pad Pattern function, you can have
the velocity used for playback of the song change according to
the force with which the pads are struck. When set to “OFF,”
the song is played back using the velocity specified for the
song, regardless of how strongly the pads are struck.
The sounds are played back in sequence each time the pad is
struck.
If you are playing a song set “LOOP” or “ONE SHOT” and
you then play a song set to TAP playback....then you can use/
listen to both at the same time.
•
•
When “Pad Ptn (Pad Pattern)” is set to “OFF,” a
horizontal line (
) is displayed, and you cannot make
this setting. Refer to the previous section, then after
selecting the song, make the setting.
•
•
fig.01-037a_50
•
•
Performances using the Pad Pattern function cannot be
recorded to sequencers.
fig.01-038_50
Pa d Ptn Ve lo (Pa d Pa tte rn Ve lo city ): O FF, O N
6 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
Pitch Co n tro l w ith th e Hi-Ha t
Co n tro l Pe d a l O n / O ff fo r Ea ch Pa d
(Pitch Co n tro l Assig n )
Pitch Control is a function that lets you change the pitch of an
instrument assigned to a pad according to the amount the hi-
hat control pedal is pressed. Releasing the pedal returns the
instrument to its original pitch.
MIDI N o te N u m b e r fo r Ea ch Pa d
(N o te N u m b e r)
In each drum kit, you can set the MIDI note numbers to be
transmitted/ received by each pad.
For the hi-hat, make the setting only for the note number for
the Open Hi-Hat (default setting is 46 (A#2)). With this setting,
the closed hi-hat (initial settings value of 42 (F#2)) and pedal
hi-hat (initial settings value of 44 (G#2)) are changed together
to the open setting.
Here, make the Pitch Control on/ off setting for each pad.
When set to “OFF,” the instrument’s pitch remains
unchanged.
The range over which the pitch changes is set in
“PchCtrlRange (Pitch Control Range)” (KIT/ COMMON/
When the open hi-hat note number is set to “60 (C4),” the note
number for the closed hi-hat becomes “56 (G#3)” and the note
number for the pedal hi-hat becomes “58 (A#3).”
•
•
To prevent the pedal hi-hat sound from being played
when the hi-hat pedal is pressed, set “Pedal HH Vol
(Pedal Hi-Hat Volume)” to “0” (KIT/ COMMON/ Pedal
For information on factory-set note number settings, refer to
To make pitch changes occur more smoothly, set
“PdlDataThin (Pedal Data Thin)” to “1” or “OFF”
fig.01-041_50
fig.01-039_50
N o te N o . (N o te N u m b e r): 0 (C -) –1 2 7 (G 9 )
Pitch Ctrl (Pitch Co n tro l Assig n ): O FF, O N
So u n d in g a n Ex te rn a l MIDI De vice b y
Pla y in g Pa d s Co n n e cte d to th e TD-6
Specify the MIDI note numbers (key numbers on a keyboard)
that will be transmitted by the TD-6 when the pads are struck.
Set this to the note number of the sound that you wish to play
on the external sound module or sampler.
Usin g a n Ex te rn a l MIDI De vice to Pla y
TD-6 Dru m Kit Pa rt So u n d s
(TD-6 Use d As So u n d Mo d u le )
Specify the note number corresponding to the pad. When the
TD-6 receives the note number specified here, the instrument
assigned to the pad is played.
On the TD-6, the drum kit part and percussion part can both
be set to Channel 10 at the same time.
When two parts are set to channel 10, you should also set
“CH10Priority (Channel 10 Priority)” to determine whether
6 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
the instrument (the drum kit part) or the percussion set
instrument (the percussion part) is to be played when the note
number is received (SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ CH10Priorty;
MIDI Ga te Tim e fo r Ea ch Pa d
(Ga te Tim e )
For each pad, you can specify the length of time the note will
“hold” during transmission from the MIDI OUT.
Percussion sound modules normally produce sound only in
response to “Note on” messages, and ignore “Note off”
messages. However general-purpose sound modules or
samplers do receive the note-off messages that are transmitted
and respond by turning off the sound.
W h e n Se ttin g Mu ltip le Pa d s to th e Sa m e N o te
N u m b e r
When using an external MIDI device to play TD-6 drum kits,
if overlapping note numbers are received, the instrument
assigned to the pad connected to the lowest-numbered trigger
input is sounded.
At the factory settings, the Gate Time setting is set to the
minimum value, since a drum sound module will likely not
make use of it. If a sound module received this data as it is
receiving a Note OFF message, the interval will be too short,
so most sounds will not be played (or it may sound like barely
perceptible noise). To avoid this problem, set a longer gate
time for each pad that is to be played.
When note numbers for the head and rim are duplicated, the
head instrument is played.
When the pad is struck, the note number set for the pad is
sent.
When the same note number is assigned to more than one
pad, then “ ” appears in the settings screen for the pad that
is prevented from sounding even when the Note Number is
received.
fig.01-040ai
fig.01-045_50
Ga te Tim e : 0 .1 –8 .0 se c (0 .1 se c. ste p s)
The following appears in the display when “38 (D2)” is
specified for the head (H02) and rim (R02) of Trigger Input 2
(SNARE) and the head (H04) of Trigger Input 4 (TOM1).
fig.01-042ai.e
Trigger Input 2 (SNARE) Head
Trigger Input 2 (SNARE) Rim
Trigger Input 4 (TOM1) Head
In this case, when Note Number 38 (D2) is received, the
instrument assigned to the HEAD of TRIGGER INPUT 2
(SNARE) is played.
6 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
Ad ju stin g th e Vo lu m e o f th e Pe d a l
Hi-Ha t So u n d (Pe d a l Hi-Ha t Vo lu m e )
For each drum kit, you can adjust the volume of the pedal hi-
hat that sound (when the hi-hat control pedal is pressed). The
higher the value is set, the greater the volume. With a setting
of “0,” no sound is produced.
O ve ra ll Dru m Kit Se ttin g s
(CO MMO N )
Make the settings for each drum kit.
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
2 . Press [KIT], then [EDIT].
[KIT] and [EDIT] light.
Set the volume level of other pads with the “Level” setting
3 . Press [
] to select “COMMON.”
fig.KIT-CMN_50
fig.01-049_50 (KIT-COMMON-Pedal-Hat)
4 . Press [ENTER
5 . Press [ ] or [
wish to edit.
].
] to select the parameter you
Pe d a l HH Vo l (Pe d a l Hi-Ha t Vo lu m e ): 0 –1 5
fig.01-046ai.e
Se ttin g th e Ra n g e fo r th e Pitch
Co n tro l w ith th e Hi-Ha t Co n tro l
Pe d a l (Pe d a l Pitch Co n tro l Ra n g e )
Parameter to set
Pitch Control is a function that lets you change the pitch of an
instrument assigned to a pad according to the amount the hi-
hat control pedal is pressed.
6 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.01-047ai.e
Releasing the pedal returns the instrument to its original pitch.
The degree to which the pitch is to change when the hi-hat
control pedal is pressed is set in semitone (half-step)
increments from -24 (down two octaves) to +24 (up two
octaves). When set to “0,” there is no change in pitch.
Value
7 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] to
end the procedure.
Pitch Control is turned on and off in the “Pitch Ctrl (Pitch
O ve ra ll Dru m Kit Vo lu m e
(Ma ste r Vo lu m e )
You can adjust the overall volume of the drum kit while
preserving the volume balance between each of the pads. The
higher the value is set, the greater the volume. With a setting
of “0,” no sound is produced.
•
•
To prevent the pedal hi-hat sound from being played
when the hi-hat pedal is pressed, set “Pedal HH Vol
(Pedal Hi-Hat Volume)” to “0” (KIT/ COMMON/ Pedal
To have changes in pitch occur smoothly, set
“PdlDataThin (Pedal Data Thin)” to “1” or “OFF”
The volume balance among the pads is adjusted in the “Level”
fig.01-050_50
fig.01-048_50
Pch CtrlRa n g e (Pe d a l Pitch Co n tro l Ra n g e ):
-2 4 –+2 4
Ma ste rVo lu m e (Ma ste r Vo lu m e ): 0 –1 2 7
6 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
4 . Press [ENTER
].
N a m in g th e Dru m Kit (Kit N a m e )
Each kit can be given a name of up to 8 characters.
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the copy-
source drum kit.
fig.01-052ai.e
Press [
] or [
] to move the cursor (under bar) to the
character you want to change, then press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -]
to select the character.
Drum Kit Number
Drum Kit Name
•
Holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [INC/ +] switches
through the following sequence: uppercase alphabet ■
lowercase alphabet ■ 0 ■ ! ■ space. Holding down
[SHIFT] and pressing [DEC/ -] switches through the
sequence in reverse order.
6 . Press [
].
The copy destination drum kit selection screen appears.
7 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the copy-
destination drum kit.
fig.01-053ai.e
•
•
Holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [
] deletes the
character at the cursor position and closes the resulting
space by shifting forward the characters that follow.
Holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [
] inserts a space
at the character at the cursor position and shifts back the
characters that follow.
Drum Kit Number
Drum Kit Name
8 . Press [ENTER
].
Press [EXIT] to cancel the operation.
fig.01-054_50
fig.01-051_50
9 . Press [ENTER
] to execute the operation.
KitN a m e (Dru m Kit N a m e ): 8 ch a ra cte rs
When you have finished copying the drum kit, the
The following characters may be used.
fig.lettersai.e
Completed screen appears.
fig.01-055_50
space
1 0 . When you finish copying, press [KIT] to end the
procedure.
Co p y in g a Dru m Kit (CO PY)
Src (Co p y So u rce ):
P0 1 –P9 9 (Fa cto ry Se ttin g Dru m Kits),
U0 1 –U9 9 (Dru m Kits)
You can copy the instrument, ambience, equalizer, and all
other settings in a drum kit.
Executing this operation deletes the content of the copy
destination, so check all content carefully before carrying out
this operation.
Select a drum kit marked with “ ” as the copy source (P01–
P99) to restore original factory drum kits.
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
Dst (Co p y De stin a tio n ):
U0 1 –U9 9 (Dru m Kits)
2 . Press [KIT], then [EDIT].
[KIT] and [EDIT] light.
3 . Press [
fig.KIT-COPY_50
] to select “COPY.”
6 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Cre a tin g Yo u r O w n Dru m Kit (Kit Ed it)
7 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the (second)
Re sto rin g th e Fa cto ry Se ttin g s fo r
th e Ed ite d Dru m Kit
drum kit to be exchanged.
fig.01-057ai.e
You can restore reconfigured drum kits to their original
factory conditions.
Drum Kit Number
Drum Kit Name
Dru m Kit Co p y Fu n ctio n
8 . Press [ENTER
].
marked with “ ” (P01–P99) as the copy source.
Press [EXIT] to cancel the operation.
fig.01-058_50
Fa cto ry Re se t Fu n ctio n
1 . Select the drum kit that you want to return to
factory conditions.
9 . Press [ENTER
] to execute the operation.
When you have finished exchanging the drum kits, the
Completed screen appears.
fig.01-059_50
to select “THIS DRUM KIT.”
Sw itch in g th e O rd e r o f th e
Dru m Kits (EXCHAN GE)
1 0 . When you finish exchanging, press [KIT] to end
the procedure.
You can switch (exchange) the place in order of any two drum
kits.
Src (Ex ch a n g e So u rce ):
U0 1 –U9 9 (Dru m Kits)
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
Dst (Ex ch a n g e De stin a tio n ):
U0 1 –U9 9 (Dru m Kits)
2 . Press [KIT], then [EDIT].
[KIT] and [EDIT] light.
3 . Press [
fig.KIT-XCHG_50
] to select “EXCHANGE.”
4 . Press [ENTER
].
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the (first)
drum kit to be exchanged.
fig.01-056ai.e
Drum Kit Number
Drum Kit Name
6 . Press [
].
7 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Ma k in g th e Pa d a n d Trig g e r Se ttin g s
(SETUP/ TRIG)
Pa ra m e te rs Th a t Ca n Be Se t He re
Se le ctin g th e Pa d Ty p e
(Trig g e r Ty p e )
fig.02-001.e
SETUP
TRIGGER BASIC (Pad Sensitivity Settings) (p. 72)
To ensure that the TD-6 accurately receives signals sent from
the pads, be sure to specify the trigger type (the type of pads
being used).
Trigger Type
Sensitivity
Threshold
Set each trigger input as described below.
Trigger Curve
Crosstalk Cancel
Setting the trigger type allows the TD-6 to accurately detect
the force used to strike the pads and avoid secondary
sounding of a pad (retriggering). You can also set this up for
PD-80R and PD-120 rim shots.
TRIGGER ADVANCED (Detailed Pad Settings) (p. 74)
Scan Time
Retrigger Cancel
Mask Time
After making the trigger type settings, adjust the pad
sensitivity and carry out other adjustments as needed.
Rim Sensitivity
When you set the Trigger Type, the following parameters are
automatically set to the most efficient values.
They should be adjusted as necessary to match the actual state
of your configuration and the environment in which it is being
used.
Ab o u t th e Scre e n Disp la y
N o ta tio n Use d in th e Scre e n
Trigger input numbers and names are indicated in pad and
trigger settings screens.
fig.SETUP-BASIC
Basic Trigger Parameter
•
•
•
Sensitivity
Threshold
TrigCurve
Screen
KIK
SNR
HH
Name
KICK
Screen
T3
Name
Advanced Trigger Parameter
TOM3
SNARE
HI-HAT
TOM1
TOM2
AUX
T4
TOM4
•
•
•
•
Scan TIme
Retrig Cancel
Mask Time
Rim Sens
CR1
CR2
RD
CRASH1
CRASH2
RIDE
T1
T2
AUX
Ab o u t th e In p u t In d ica to r
The input indicator is indicated in the pad and trigger settings
screens as shown in the following. A flag is raised when the
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT
indicator reaches the maximum position (
).
fig.P-020aai.e
(SETUP)].
Indicator
[EDIT] lights.
2 . Press [
fig.SETUP-BASIC_50
] to select “TRIG BASIC.”
Maximum Indication
Indicator (Maximum)
7 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Ma k in g th e Pa d a n d Trig g e r Se ttin g s (SETUP/ TRIG)
7 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] or
3 . Press [ENTER
fig.02-002ai.e
].
[SONG] to end the procedure.
Trig Ty p (Trig g e r Ty p e ):
PD6 , PD7 / 9 , PD-8 0 / 1 0 0 , PD8 0 R, PD1 2 0 , KD7 ,
KD Ty p e , CY6 , CY Ty p e , O th e r 1 , O th e r 2 ,
AcDrTrig
4 . Strike the pad you wish to set.
The setting screen for the struck pad appears.
Se ttin g th e Pa d Se n sitivity
a n d Ma k in g O th e r Se ttin g s
(TRIGGER BASIC)
This setting applies to both the head and rim.
5 . Find the trigger type for the pad you are using
from the following chart.
You can make more detailed settings for the pad type and
sensitivity.
Pad
Trigger Type
PD7/ 9
Pad
Trigger Type
CY6
PD-5
CY-6
The following parameters (Basic Trigger Parameters except
the “Xtalk Cancel”) are automatically set to the most efficient
values for each pad when you select the “TrigTyp (Trigger
Make the settings for each parameter as needed.
PD-6
PD6
CY-12H
CY-14C
CY-15R
KD-5
CY Type
CY Type
CY Type
KD7
PD-7
PD7/ 9
PD-9
PD7/ 9
PD-80
PD-80R
PD-100
PD-120
PD80/ 100
PD80R
KD-7
KD7
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT
PD80/ 100
PD120
KD-80
KD-120
KD Type
KD Type
(SETUP)].
[EDIT] lights.
2 . Press [
] to select “TRIG BASIC.”
•
•
Use the “AcDrTrig” setting when you use acoustic drums
fig.SETUP-BASIC_50
When using a pad made by another manufacturer, first
select “PD7/ 9” and try playing the pad. (For a kick, select
“KD Type.”) If, with this setting, the pad striking force
does not produce a stable volume, try a setting of “P1.” A
setting of “P2” will be even more stable, but since the Scan
Time (p. 69) will be even longer, the interval from when
the pad is struck until the sound is heard will be slightly
(approximately 0.003 seconds) longer, or it will be difficult
to obtain changes based on playing dynamics. The “Other
1" and “Other 2" settings are for use with pads with trigger
output waveforms that have a slow attack.
3 . Press [ENTER
].
] to select the parameter you
4 . Press [
] or [
wish to edit.
fig.02-004ai.e
Parameter to set
5 . Strike the pad you wish to set.
The settings screen for the struck pad appears, and the
input indicator fluctuates.
There may be no improvement of conditions when non-
Roland pads are used, even after changing the trigger
parameter settings. For fullest expression in performance,
we recommend the exclusive use of Roland pads.
6 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.02-005ai.e
6 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.02-003ai.e
Value
7 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] or
[SONG] to end the procedure.
Value
7 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Ma k in g th e Pa d a n d Trig g e r Se ttin g s (SETUP/ TRIG)
Ad ju stin g th e Pa d Se n sitivity (Se n sitivity )
Ad ju st Ho w Pla y in g Dy n a m ics
Ch a n g e s th e Vo lu m e (Trig g e r Cu rve )
This setting allows to control the relation between the velocity
(striking force) and changes in volume (the dynamic curve.)
Adjust this curve until the response feels as natural as
possible.
Adjust the sensitivity of the pad to regulate the pad response.
Higher settings result in higher sensitivity, so that the pad will
produce a loud volume even when struck softly.
Adjust the “Sensitivity” value so that the strongest strikes
the maximum level.
fig.02-009_50
fig.02-006_50
Trig Cu rve (Trig g e r Cu rve ):
LIN EAR, EXP1 , EXP2 , LO G1 , LO G2 , SPLIN E,
LO UD1 , LO UD2
Se n sitivity : 1 –1 6
LINEAR:
The standard setting. This produces the most natural correspondence
Se ttin g th e Min im u m Le ve ls fo r th e
Pa d s (Th re sh o ld )
between the strength of the strike and the change in volume.
fig.02-010.e
Volume
This setting allows a trigger signal to be received only when
the pad is struck harder than a specified force. This can be
used to prevent a pad from sounding in response to
extraneous vibrations from another pad.In the following
example, B will sound but A and C will not sound.
fig.02-007.e
Striking Force
LINEAR
Threshold
EXP1,EXP2:
A
B
C
Compared to LINEAR, a strong strike will produce a greater change.
fig.02-011.e
Volume
Volume
When set to a higher value, no sound is produced when the
pad is struck lightly.
Striking Force
Gradually raise the “Threshold” value while striking the pad.
Check this and adjust accordingly. Repeat this process until
you get the perfect setting for your playing style.
EXP1
LOG1,LOG2:
Compared to LINEAR, a soft strike will produce a greater change.
EXP2
fig.02-012.e
Volume
Volume
fig.02-008_50
Th re sh o ld : 0 –1 5
Striking Force
LOG1
LOG2
7 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Ma k in g th e Pa d a n d Trig g e r Se ttin g s (SETUP/ TRIG)
SPLINE:
Extreme changes are made in response to the force used to
strike the pad.
The pad’s settings screen is not switched when “Note Chase” is
fig.02-013.e
Volume
fig.02-025_50
Striking Force
SPLINE
Xta lk Ca n ce l (Cro ssta lk Ca n ce l):
O FF, 2 0 , 2 5 , 3 0 , 3 5 , 4 0 , 4 5 , 5 0 , 5 5 , 6 0 , 6 5 ,
7 0 , 7 5 , 8 0
LOUD1, LOUD2:
Changes made in response to the striking force are minor,
maintaining a volume level at which it is easy to play. When
using drum triggers, these settings help maintain stable levels.
fig.02-014.e (LOUD)
Fin e -Tu n in g th e Trig g e r
Pa ra m e te r Se ttin g s
Volume
Volume
(TRIGGER ADVAN CED)
The following parameters (Advanced Trigger Parameters) are
automatically set to the most efficient values for each pad
when you select the TRIGGER TYPE (SETUP/ TRIG BASIC/
experience any of the problems that are discussed below.
Striking Force
LOUD1
LOUD2
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT (SETUP)].
Elim in a te Cro ssta lk Be tw e e n Pa d s
(Cro ssta lk Ca n ce l)
[EDIT] lights.
When two pads are mounted on the same stand, the vibration
produced by hitting one pad may trigger the sound from
another pad unintentionally (This is called crosstalk.) You
can avoid this problem by adjusting Crosstalk Cancel on the
pad that is sounding inadvertently.
2 . Press [
] to select “TRIG ADVNCD.”
fig.SETUP-ADVNCD_50 (SETUP-ADVNCD)
3 . Press [ENTER
].
] to select the parameter you
If the value is set too high, then when two pads are played
simultaneously, the one that is struck less forcefully will not
sound. So be careful and set this parameter to the minimum
value required to prevent such crosstalk. With a setting of
“OFF,” crosstalk prevention does not function.
4 . Press [
] or [
wish to edit.
fig.02-017ai.e
Parameter to set
In some cases, you can prevent crosstalk between two pads
you have connected by increasing the distance between the
pads.
5 . Strike the pad you wish to set.
The settings screen for the struck pad appears, and the
input indicator fluctuates.
Ex a m p le :
6 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
W h e n h ittin g a sn a re p a d , th e h i-h a t cy m b a l a lso
so u n d s
fig.02-018ai.e
Set the “Xtalk Cancel (Crosstalk Cancel) for the pad being
used for the hi-hat while striking the snare pad. Striking the
snare pad, raise the “CROSSTALK” setting for the hi-hat
cymbal pad from “OFF” through “20,” “25.”.. until crosstalk
no longer occurs. As this value is raised, the hi-hat cymbal pad
will be less prone to receive crosstalk from other pads.
Value
7 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] or
[SONG] to end the procedure.
7 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Ma k in g th e Pa d a n d Trig g e r Se ttin g s (SETUP/ TRIG)
played fast (roll etc.). Set this to the lowest value possible
while still ensuring that there is no retriggering.
Ad ju stin g th e Trig g e r Sig n a l
De te ctio n Tim e (Sca n Tim e )
Since the rise time of the trigger signal waveform may differ
slightly depending on the characteristics of each pad or
acoustic drum trigger (drum pickup), you may notice that
identical hits (velocity) may produce sound at different
volumes. If this occurs, you can adjust the “SCAN TIME” so
You can also eliminate this problem of retriggering with the
Mask Time setting. Mask Time does not detect trigger signals
if they occur within the specified amount of time after the
previous trigger signal was received. Retrigger Cancel detects
that your velocity of playing can be detected more precisely.
As the value is set higher, the time it takes for the sound to be
the attenuation of the trigger signal level, and triggers the
sound after internally determining which trigger signals were
actually generated when the head was struck, while weeding
out the other false trigger signals that need not trigger a
sound.
played increases.
fig.02-019.e
Scan Time
Ma k in g th e se ttin g s
Time
While repeatedly striking the pad, raise the “Retrig Cancel”
value until retriggering no longer occurs.
fig.02-022_50
Ma k in g th e se ttin g s
While repeatedly hitting the pad at a constant force, gradually
raise the Scan Time value from 0 msec, until the resulting
volume stabilizes at the loudest level. At this setting, try both
soft and loud strikes, and make sure that the volume changes
appropriately.
Re trig Ca n ce l (Re trig g e r Ca n ce l): 1 –1 6
Do u b le Trig g e rin g Pre ve n tio n
(Ma sk Tim e )
fig.02-020_50
On a kick pad, for example, if the beater bounces back and
strikes the pad a second time immediately after the intended
stroke—or, like with acoustic drums if you leave the bass
drum beater against the head—it can cause a single strike to
“double trigger” (two sounds instead of the intended one).
The Mask Time setting helps to prevent such problems. Once
a pad has been hit, any additional trigger signals occurring
within the specified “MASKTIME” (0–64 msec) will be
ignored.
Sca n Tim e : 0 –4 .0 (m s) (0 .1 m s ste p s)
De te ctin g Trig g e r Sig n a l Atte n u a tio n
a n d Ca n ce llin g In co rre ct Trig g e rin g
(Re trig g e r Ca n ce l)
When set to a high value, it then becomes easy for sounds to
be omitted when the kick is struck repeatedly in rapid
Playing snare drum pads and other devices with
commercially available acoustic drum triggers attached may
result in altered waveforms, which may also cause inadvertent
succession. Set this to as low a value as you can.
fig.02-023.e
sounding at Point A in the following figure.
fig.02-021.e
Mask Time
A
Time
Time
Sound not produced
This occurs in particular at the decaying edge of the
waveform. Retrigger Cancel detects such distortion in and
prevents retriggering from occurring.
If two or more sounds are being produced when you strike the
head just once, then adjust Retrigger Cancel.
Although setting this to a high value prevents retriggering, it
then becomes easy for sounds to be omitted when the drums
7 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Ma k in g th e Pa d a n d Trig g e r Se ttin g s (SETUP/ TRIG)
Ma k in g th e se ttin g s
Usin g th e TD-6 w ith Aco u stic
Trig g e rs
While stepping on the pad being used for the kick, raise the
“Mask Time” value until there is no more bouncing (sounds
made by the rebounding of the beater).
First, attach a commercially available acoustic drum trigger to
the acoustic drums. When finished, proceed with the
following settings.
fig.02-024_50
1 . Set the trigger type to “AcDrTrig.”
2 . Set “Threshold” to “0” as a reference value.
Ma sk Tim e : 0 –6 4 m s (4 m s ste p s)
3 . Set “TrigCurve (Trigger Curve)” to “LINEAR” as
a reference value.
Se ttin g Rim Se n sitivity o n th e PD-
1 2 0 a n d PD-8 0 R (Rim Se n s)
4 . Set the “Sensitivity.”
When a PD-80R or PD-120 is used for TRIGGER INPUT 2
(SNARE), you can then adjust the Rim Sensitivity.
Setting this to a higher value makes it easier to get rim sounds.
When set to “OFF,” playing a rim shot produces the head
instrument’s sound. Increasing the value excessively may
cause the rim instrument to sound as well when the head is
struck.
5 . Set the “Scan Time.”
Strike the head several times with the same force, and
adjust this parameter if the volume is uneven.
6 . Set the “Retrig Cancel (Retrigger Cancel).”
This prevents multiple notes from sounding when a
drum is struck once (mainly for a snare drum or toms).
•
•
This can be adjusted only when the Trigger Input 2
“Trigger Type (Trig Type)” is set to either “PD80R” or
When the trigger type is set to something other than
“PD80R” or “PD120,” or when a trigger input other than
7 . Set the “Mask Time.”
On a kick drum, this prevents two sounds instead of the
intended “one.”
Trigger Input 2 is selected, a horizontal line (
appears, and you cannot make the setting.
)
8 . Set the “Xtalk Cancel (Crosstalk Cancel).”
fig.02-015_50
This prevents other instruments with drum triggers from
sounding when a drum to which a drum trigger has been
attached is struck. If a higher value is set, and if two pads
are played simultaneously, the one that is struck less
forcefully will not sound. Set this to as low a value as you
can.
•
You cannot adjust the rim sensitivity of the PD-7 and PD-
9. Both rim and head use the same values.
9 . Set the “Threshold.”
fig.02-016_50
If notes are unintentionally sounded even after you have
adjusted the “CROSSTALK” setting, adjust the
“THRESHOLD.” Setting this to a higher value may
prevent sounds from being produced when the pad is
struck lightly. Set this to as low a value as you can.
Rim Se n s (Rim Se n sitivity ): O FF, 1 –1 5
1 0 . Set the “TrigCurve (Trigger Curve).”
If changes in playing dynamics do not produce a natural
change in the volume of the TD-6 instrument, adjust this
parameter.
7 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 Glo b a l Se ttin g s fo r th e TD-6
(SETUP/ UTILITY, Fa cto ry Re se t)
Pa ra m e te rs Th a t Ca n Be Se t He re
Disp la y Co n tra st Ad ju stm e n t
(LCD Co n tra st)
fig.03-001.e
SETUP
The display contrast is strongly influenced by the location of
the TD-6 and the lighting of the room it’s in. Adjust this
parameter when needed. A larger value results in a brighter
screen.
UTILITY (Overall Settings) (p. 77)
LCD Contrast
Percussion Part Level
Backing Level
Mute
Master Tune
fig.03-004_50
Preview Velocity
Available Memory
Factory Reset (Restoring the Factory Settings) (p. 79)
LCD Co n tra st: 1 –1 6
Ma k in g th e Glo b a l Se ttin g s
(UTILITY)
Pe rcu ssio n Pa rt Vo lu m e Co n tro l
(Pe rcu ssio n Pa rt Le ve l)
This adjusts the volume of the percussion part.
Raising the value will increase the volume. With a setting of
“0,” no sound is produced.
Overall settings that apply to the entire TD-6.
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT
(SETUP)].
[EDIT] lights.
fig.SETUP-GENERAL_50
•
•
This volume setting is applied to all songs. Even when
songs are switched, the setting does not change.
2 . Press [ENTER
].
] to select the parameter you
3 . Press [
] or [
The volume level of the drum kit part is adjusted in the
“MasterVolume (Master Volume)” (KIT/ COMMON/
wish to edit.
fig.03-002ai.e
fig.03-004a_50
Parameter to set
4 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.03-003ai.e
Pe rcPrtLe ve l (Pe rcu ssio n Pa rt Le ve l): 0 –1 2 7
Value
5 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] or
[SONG] to end the procedure.
7 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 Glo b a l Se ttin g s fo r th e TD-6 (SETUP/ UTILITY, Fa cto ry Re se t)
Ba ck in g In stru m e n ts Vo lu m e
Co n tro l (Ba ck in g Le ve l)
•
Performances using the TD-6 and pads are recorded as a
drum kit part.
This adjusts the volume of the backing part (Parts 1–4).
Raising the value will increase the volume. With a setting of
“0,” no sound is produced.
fig.03-006_50
•
•
This volume setting is applied to all songs. Even when
songs are switched, the setting does not change.
Mu te :
So n g Dru m , So n g Drm / Prc, Use rDrm Pa rt, Pa rt1 ,
Pa rt2 , Pa rt3 , Pa rt4 , Pa rt1 -4
SongDrum:
•
•
•
The volume level of the drum kit part is adjusted in the
“MasterVolume (Master Volume)” (KIT/ COMMON/
Mutes only the drum instruments in the percussion part (the
percussion instruments still sound). This is convenient when
performing with Preset songs.
Adjust the volume level of each part to correct the
SongDrm/Prc:
All percussion part instruments are muted.
UserDrmPart:
Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SONG] to jump to this
screen.
Mutes the performance recorded to the drum kit part. This is
convenient when you want to perform along with songs you
have recorded yourself.
fig.03-005_50
Part1, Part2, Part3, Part4:
The individual parts are muted.
Part1-4:
All Parts 1–4 are muted.
Ba ck in g Le ve l (Ba ck in g Le ve l): 0 –1 2 7
Tu n in g th e TD-6 (Ma ste r Tu n e )
This tunes Parts 1–4 as a whole.
Mu tin g Pa rts o f a So n g (Mu te )
Select the part that is to be muted when [PART MUTE] is
pressed. [PART MUTE] lights while the muting is in effect.
The reference pitch is 440.0 Hz.
Tuning of the drum kit part and percussion part instruments
is not affected by this setting.
fig.03-007_50 (SETUP-GENERAL-MasterTune)
Hold down [SHIFT] and press [PART MUTE] to jump to this
screen.
Ma ste rTu n e (Ma ste r Tu n e ):
4 1 5 .3 –4 6 6 .2 (Hz) (0 .1 Hz ste p s)
•
•
•
This setting remains in effect even when songs are
switched and when the TD-6 is played using data from
an external MIDI device.
All percussion instruments in the Preset songs (except for
Preset song #1 “DRUMS”) are recorded to the percussion
parts.
Note numbers for muted drum instruments are
predetermined and cannot be changed. For more on
7 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 Glo b a l Se ttin g s fo r th e TD-6 (SETUP/ UTILITY, Fa cto ry Re se t)
2 . Press [
fig.P-005_50
] to select “FactoryReset”
Pre vie w Vo lu m e Co n tro l
(Pre vie w Ve lo city )
This sets the velocity used when an instrument is previewed.
Raising the value will increase the volume. With a setting of
“0,” no sound is produced.
3 . Press [ENTER
].
The Factory Reset screen appears.
fig.03-008_50
4 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the parameter
you want to restore to factory settings.
fig.P-006_50
Pre vie w Ve lo city : 0 –1 2 7
Value
Ch e ck in g th e Re m a in in g Am o u n t o f
Me m o ry (Ava ila b le Me m o ry )
5 . Press [ENTER
].
Press [EXIT] to cancel the operation.
You can check the amount of available memory.
The confirmation screen appears.
fig.P-007_50
fig.03-009_50
6 . If you’re ready to proceed, press [ENTER
and the Factory Reset operation will be
executed.
],
Ava ilMe m o ry (Ava ila b le Me m o ry ): 0 –1 0 0 %
7 . When the Factory Reset is finished, the
Re sto rin g th e Fa cto ry Se ttin g s
(Fa cto ry Re se t)
Completed screen appears.
fig.P-008_50
This restores the pad and instrument settings, song data, and
other information stored in the TD-6 to the original factory
settings.
Re se t (Fa cto ry Re se t):
ALL, THIS DRUM KIT, ALL DRUM KITS,
ALL SO N GS
All data and settings stored in the TD-6 are lost in carrying out
this operation. Use the “Bulk Dump” operation to save crucial
data and settings to an external MIDI device (SETUP/ BULK
ALL:
All internal settings will be restored to the factory settings.
THIS DRUM KIT:
Only the settings for the currently selected drum kit are
restored to the factory settings.
ALL DRUM KITS:
When [SHIFT] and [EDIT (SETUP)] are held down when the
power is turned on, the display jumps to the Factory Reset
The settings for all of the TD-6’s internal drum kits are
restored to the
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT
(SETUP)].
factory settings.
ALL SONGS:
[EDIT (SETUP)] lights.
All of the TD-6’s internal song data is restored to the factory
settings.
7 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Se ttin g th e Me tro n o m e
(Click Ed it)
fig.04-004_50
Pa ra m e te rs Th a t Ca n Be Se t He re
fig.04-001.e
CLICK (Click Settings) (p. 80)
Click Level
Time Signature
TEMPO : 2 0 –2 6 0
Interval
Inst
Pan
Se ttin g th e W a y th e Click
So u n d s
Play Count In
Rec Count In
Settings that determine how the click sounds, volume, time
signature etc.
Sw itch in g th e Click O n / O ff (Click )
1 . Confirm that [EDIT] is not lit.
If this lights, press [KIT] or [SONG] to extinguish it.
You can switch the click sound on and off by pressing [CLICK].
[CLICK] lights while the click sound is set to be played.
fig.04-002.e
2 . Press [CLICK].
[CLICK] lights, and the click sound begins to play.
Click is played
Click is not played
3 . Press [EDIT].
4 . Press [
] or [
] to select the parameter you
wish to edit.
fig.04-005ai.e
Lit
Unlit
Parameter to set
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.04-006ai.e
Te m p o Ad ju stm e n t (Te m p o )
For each song selected, the tempo of the click changes to the
tempo specified for that song.
Value
1 . Press [CLICK].
6 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] or
[CLICK] lights, and the click sound begins to play.
[SONG] to end the procedure.
2 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [CLICK
(TEMPO)].
The “TEMPO” screen appears.
fig.04-003_50
Vo lu m e Ad ju stm e n t (Click Le ve l)
Adjusts the volume of the click sound. Raising the value will
increase the volume. With a setting of “0,” no sound is
produced.
3 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the tempo.
fig.04-007_50
4 . When you finish making settings, press [EXIT]
to end the procedure.
The “TEMPO” screen disappears.
Click Le ve l: 0 –1 2 7
8 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Se ttin g th e Me tro n o m e (Click Ed it)
Se ttin g th e Tim e Sig n a tu re
(Tim e Sig n a tu re )
Specify the time signature of the click sound.When the
numerator is set to “0,” no accent is added to the first beat. The
metronome click sound then plays at a fixed volume.
Ste re o Po sitio n (Pa n )
You can localize the metronome click within the stereo sound
field.
The effect set here is applied only when connected in stereo.
fig.04-011_50
It is not possible to change the time signature of the metronome
clicks while a song is playing back. The metronome clicks
corresponds to the time signature of the song.
fig.04-008_50 (CLICK-Time Signature)
Pa n : L1 5 –Ce n te r–R1 5
L15:
CENTER: Positions the sound in the center.
R15: Sound is positioned at the extreme right.
Sound is positioned at the extreme left.
Tim e Sig (Tim e Sig n a tu re ):
0 –1 3 / 2 , 0 –1 3 / 4 , 0 –1 3 / 8 , 0 –1 3 / 1 6
In se rtin g a Co u n t Be fo re Pla y b a ck
o r Re co rd in g (Pla y Co u n t In , Re c
Co u n t In )
Se ttin g th e In te rva l (In te rva l)
Setting How the Sound Plays (Interval).
You can have a count sound (click) inserted before recording
or playback of a song begins.
fig.04-009_50
fig.04-012_50
In te rva l:
1 / 2 (h a lf n o te ), 3 / 8 (d o tte d q u a rte r n o te ),
1 / 4 (q u a rte r n o te ), 1 / 8 (e ig h th n o te ),
1 / 1 2 (1 2 th n o te ), 1 / 1 6 (1 6 th n o te )
Ply Co u n tIn (Pla y Co u n t In ):
O FF, 1 MEAS, 2 MEAS
fig.04-013_50
Se le ctin g th e Click So u n d (In st)
You can choose the sound for the metronome click. When the
parameter is set to “VOICE,” the click is sound becomes a
human voice.
Re cCo u n tIn (Re c Co u n t In ):
O FF, 1 MEAS, 2 MEAS
OFF:
fig.04-010_50
Playback/ recording will begin without a count-in.
1MEAS:
Playback/ recording begins after a 1-measure count-in.
2MEAS:
In st:
Playback/ recording begins after a 2-measure count-in.
VO ICE, CLICK, BEEP, METRO N O ME, CLAVES,
W O O D BLO CK, STICKS, CRO SS STICK,
TRIAN GLE, CO W BELL, CO N GA, TALKIN G DRM,
MARACAS, CABASA, CUICA, AGO GO ,
TAMBO URIN E, SN APS, 9 0 9 SN ARE, 8 0 8
CO W BELL
8 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ed itin g So n g s
(SO N G Ed it)
Usin g Pre se t So n g s
Pa ra m e te rs Th a t Ca n Be Se t He re
fig.05-001a.e
You cannot save any changes you make to the settings in
preset songs. While you can make temporary changes to these
settings, they revert to the settings already selected for that
preset song when another song is selected.
SONG
COMMON (Overall Settings) (p. 86)
Tempo
Play Type
Furthermore, preset songs cannot be edited or recorded.
Quick Play
Reset Time
Tap Exclusive Switch
Song Lock
•
The following appears in the display when you attempt to
change the settings. Press [EXIT] to dismiss the message.
Song Name
PART (Pad Settings) (p. 88)
•
The following is displayed when the [REC
] is pressed
Percussion Set/ Inst
Level
with a Preset song selected and select a new user song
automatically.
Pan
Ambience Send Level
Bend Range
COPY (Copying Songs) (p. 90)
DELETE (Deleting Songs) (p. 91)
ERASE (Erasing Songs) (p. 92)
If you want to change, edit, or record any preset song settings,
altered, the changes are saved automatically.
Ab o u t Pre se t So n g Co p y rig h t
The sounds, phrases and songs contained in this product are
sound recordings protected by copyright. Roland hereby grants to
purchasers of this product the permission to utilize the sound
recordings contained in this product for the creation and
recording of original musical works; provided however, the
sound recordings contained in this product may not be sampled,
downloaded or otherwise re-recorded, in whole or in part, for any
other purpose, including but not limited to the transmission of all
or any part of the sound recordings via the internet or other
digital or analog means of transmission, and/ or the manufacture,
for sale or otherwise, of any collection of sampled sounds, phrases
or patterns, on CD-ROM or equivalent means.
Ab o u t So n g s a n d th e So n g
Scre e n
Ab o u t So n g s
The TD-6’s sequencer organizes music into six parts. The
Drum Kit part is used to record/ play back what is played on
the pads. Additionally, Part 1, Part 2, Part 3, and Part 4 are the
four backing instrument parts (backing parts), and there is
another Percussion part.
The sound recordings contained in this product are the original
works of Roland Corporation. Roland is not responsible for the
use of the sound recordings contained in this product, and
assumes no liability for any infringement of any copyright of any
third party arising out of use of the sounds, phrases and patterns
in this product.
The collective performance of these six parts is called a song.
Pre se t (In te rn a l) So n g s (So n g s 1 –1 5 0 )
Use r So n g s (So n g s 1 5 1 –2 5 0 )
What the various parts should play has already been
recorded. The performances in Preset patterns cannot be
changed, deleted, or recorded. These songs come in handy for
backing during drum practice, or for live performances.
These are songs that can be recorded and edited. You can
record performances exactly as they are played using the pads
Changes in User song settings are saved automatically.
Drum performances in the Preset songs (except song #1
“DRUMS”) are recorded to the percussion part.
8 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ed itin g So n g s (SO N G Ed it)
fig.05-001.e
Ab o u t th e So n g Scre e n
The screen that appears when [SONG] is pressed is called the
Song #250
Song #1
Song screen.
fig.05-002ai.e
4
5
Overall Settings
Tempo, Play Type, Song Lock, Song Name
Part Settings
Drum Kit Part (p. 56)
Percussion Part
1
2
3
6
7
1 So n g Ca te g o ry
Shows the category of the currently selected song.
Backing Part
Part1
2 So n g N u m b e r
Part2
Part3
Part4
Shows the number of the currently selected song.
3 So n g N a m e
Shows the name of the currently selected song.
Part Settings
Inst, Level, Pan*,
Ambience Send Level, Bend Range*
4 Be a t
*: This setting cannot be made
for percussion part
This indicates the song playback type.
Performance Data
Pad
Drum Kit Part
Percussion Part
Part1
6 Me a su re N u m b e r
The current measure number is indicated. Pressing
[PLAY
] starts playback from the beginning of the measure
indicated here.
External
MIDI Device
Part2
Part3
7 Be a t
Part4
The current beat is indicated.
fig.05-003ai.e
8
Only the performance data is recorded to the drum kit part.
When the song is played back, the settings of instruments and
effects etc. of the current selected drum kit are used.
9
8 So n g Lo ck Se ttin g
“
to “ON.”
9 N e w Use r So n g
“
” indicates a new User song.
8 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ed itin g So n g s (SO N G Ed it)
Ch o o sin g a So n g
Pla y in g Ba ck a So n g
Part settings are switched when a song is selected.
1 . Select the song that you wish to play back
(foregoing paragraph).
2 . Press [PLAY
].
[PLAY
] lights, and playback of the song begins.
3 . To stop playback of the song, press [STOP ].
The [PLAY
] light goes out, and the song returns to
Ch o o sin g fro m a Ca te g o ry
(So n g Ca te g o ry )
the beginning of the measure that was being played back.
Select songs by searching the category names.
When playback of a song is stopped, you can do the following.
1 . Press [SONG].
[SONG] lights, and the SONG screen appears.
fig.05-005_50
•
Pressing [STOP
song.
], returns you to the beginning of the
•
•
Pressing [
Pressing [
], advances you to the next measure.
], returns you to the previous measure.
2 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [INC/+] or [DEC/-]
to select the song category.
•
•
To temporarily change the tempo of the song, hold down
SO N G CATEGO RY:
To insert a count before playback of the song, set
DRUMS, RO CK, METAL, BALLAD, R&B, BLUES,
PO PS, R&R, CO UN TRY, JAZZ, FUSIO N , DAN CE,
REGGAE, LATIN , BRAZIL, BASICPTN , LO O P,
1 SHO T, TAP, USER
Co n ve n ie n t Fu n ctio n fo r Pla y b a ck
During playback of a song, you can have the buttons
corresponding to the drums being played in the percussion
part light up.
Ch o o sin g a So n g (So n g )
1 . Press [SONG].
Preset songs.
[SONG] lights, and the SONG screen appears.
fig.05-004_50
Drum Instrument Button Lit
Note Number
Kick
[PART MUTE] 35, 36
2 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the song.
Snare
37, 38, 39, 40
[PLAY
[KIT]
]
Low Tom
Hi-Hat
41, 43
SO N G: 1 –2 5 0
[REC]
42, 44, 46
Mid Tom
Hi Tom
Cymbal
[SONG]
[CLICK]
[EDIT]
45, 47
48, 50
49, 51, 52, 53, 55, 57, 59
Hi-Hat
Mid Tom
Low Tom
High Tom
Snare
Cymbals
Kick
8 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ed itin g So n g s (SO N G Ed it)
3 . Press [
].
The screen for setting the volume of the percussion part
Even when “9 Perc Only” or “10 Special” is selected for the
percussion set, the buttons still light up according to the note
numbers.
appears.
fig.05-007_50
4 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
•
•
The correspondence between the lighted buttons and
note numbers is predetermined and cannot be changed.
This function cannot be used with songs in which drum
performances are recorded to the drum kit part.
5 . When you finish making settings, press [SONG]
to end the procedure.
fig.05-008_50
2 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [PLAY
].
Playback of the song begins, and the buttons
corresponding to the performance of the percussion part
drums light up.
Ba ck in g Le ve l (Ba ck in g Le ve l): 0 –1 2 7
3 . To stop the playback, press [STOP ].
fig.05-009_50
Ad ju stin g th e So n g Vo lu m e
You can adjust the volume of the song in the backing parts
(Parts 1–4) and the percussion part.
Pe rcPrtLe ve l (Pe rcu ssio n Pa rt Le ve l): 0 –1 2 7
Raising the value will increase the volume. With a setting of
“0,” no sound is produced.
Mu tin g a Se le cte d Pa rt
(Pa rt Mu te )
This volume setting is applied to all songs.
Each time [PART MUTE] is pressed the mute is alternately
turned on or off. [PART MUTE] lights when the mute is on.
At the factory settings, only percussion part drum tones are
•
Although drum performances in the Preset songs are
recorded to the “percussion part,” when you create your
own songs, what you play on the pads is recorded to the
“drum kit part.” The volume level of the drum kit part is
adjusted in the “MasterVolume” (Master Volume) (KIT/
muted.
fig.05-010.e
Muted
Not muted
•
Adjust the volume level of each part to correct the
Lit
Unlit
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [SONG].
The part to be muted here is selected in “Mute” (SETUP/
MUTE] to jump to the settings screen.
The screen for setting the volume of the backing parts
appears.
fig.05-006_50
Settings for muted parts are applied to all songs.
2 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
8 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ed itin g So n g s (SO N G Ed it)
O ve ra ll So n g Se ttin g s (CO MMO N )
Te m p o ra rily Ch a n g in g th e Te m p o
o f a So n g Du rin g Pla y b a ck
Make the settings for each song.
You can temporarily change the tempo of a song while it
is being played back.
•
•
If you want to save any changes made to Preset song
settings, first copy the song to a User Song before making
Preset song are only temporary, so when you select a
different song, the song reverts to its predetermined part
settings. Changes made to Preset songs cannot be saved.
Settings of parts which have the Song Lock (SONG/
changed. Make the settings after setting this to “OFF.”
When another song is selected, the song reverts to the
tempo (SONG/ COMMON/ Tempo) preset for that song.
This is convenient for practicing or other times when you
want to temporarily change to tempo for playback.
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [CLICK].
The Tempo screen appears.
fig.05-014_50
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
2 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
2 . Press [SONG], then [EDIT].
[SONG] and [EDIT] light.
fig.SONG-CMN_50
Se le ctin g Ho w th e So n g Pla y s Ba ck
(LO O P, 1 SHO T, TAP) (Pla y Ty p e )
This specifies how songs will be played back. When
[PLAY
] is pressed or when the pad specified with the Pad
3 . Press [ENTER
4 . Press [ ] or [
wish to edit.
].
] to select the parameter you
using the type specified here.
fig.05-011ai.e
•
•
may not play back correctly with Tap Playback.
New songs cannot be set to “Tap.” Change this after first
recording something to the song.
Parameter to set
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.05-012ai.e
fig.05-015_50
Value
6 . When you finish making settings, press [SONG]
to end the procedure.
PLAY TYPE: LO O P, 1 SHO T, TAP
LOOP (
):
After the pattern is played back all the way to the end,
playback then repeats, starting at the beginning of the song.
Playback continues until [STOP
1SHOT (ONE SHOT) ( ):
] is pressed.
Se ttin g th e Te m p o (Te m p o )
You can set the tempo for each song individually. When a song is
selected, the tempo you specify here will be set automatically.
Changes made to a Preset song are temporary, and when you select
a different song, the song reverts to its predetermined settings.
Playback stops once the end of the song is reached.
struck returns you to the beginning of the song and starts
playback.
TAP (
The sounds in the song are played back one by one in
sequence each time [PLAY ] is pressed.
):
fig.05-013_50
played back in sequence each time the pad is struck.
Te m p o : 2 0 –2 6 0
8 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ed itin g So n g s (SO N G Ed it)
Pla y in g Ba ck th e So n g fro m th e
First N o te / Eve n t (Q u ick Pla y )
Pre ve n tin g La y e rin g o f So u n d s in Ta p
Pla y b a ck (Ta p Ex clu sive Sw itch )
This is an auxiliary function available when “LOOP” or
“1SHOT” is specified as the Play Type for the song (SONG/
COMMON/ Play Type; previous section).
This is an auxiliary function available when “TAP” is specified as
In Tap playback, if one sound is set to play before the previous
sound has finished playing, this setting allows you to either
have the previous sound stop and the subsequent sound start
playing (ON) or have the two sounds layered (OFF).
Quick Play starts playback of the pattern from the first note
(first event) even if when you recorded the pattern, you left a
pause at the beginning. For example if you had just played/
recorded freely, ignoring the tempo clock.
fig.05-018_50
When “Quick Play” is set to “ON,” stopping playback of the
song returns you to the beginning of the song.
Ta p Ex c SW (Ta p Ex clu sive Sw itch ): O FF, O N
OFF:
The blank portion is played when you return to the beginning
of the song while in Loop Playback.
The previous sound continues to play to the end, while the
subsequent sound is superimposed on it.
ON:
fig.05-016_50
The previous sound stops while in progress, and the
subsequent sound starts playing.
Q u ick Pla y : O FF, O N
Pro te ctin g Use r So n g Se ttin g s
(So n g Lo ck )
To prevent accidental erasure or editing, you can lock User songs.
If you attempt to change the settings of a song for which this
set to “ON,” a warning screen appears, and you cannot
change the settings.
Re se t Tim e W h e n Usin g Ta p
Pla y b a ck (Re se t Tim e )
This is an auxiliary function available when “TAP” is specified as
This feature automatically returns you to the beginning of the
song if during Tap Playback the song is not played back within a
specified interval. This value sets the time from when the song
was last played back; if the set time elapses, then returns to the
beginning before it is next played back.
However, you cannot select this during recording of a song or
when a new User song is selected by pressing [SHIFT] +
[STOP
]. Since you can also lock unused User Songs, then in
situations such as when using the TD-6 as a sound module, it’s
a good idea to lock songs when you want to save their settings.
When performing with the Pad Pattern function, if you start
playback by striking a pad and then do not strike the pad again
within the specified interval, the song is returned to the beginning.
If it is set to “OFF,” this function will be disabled.
[
] appears in the Song screen when a User Song is locked.
fig.05-018aai
fig.05-017_50
The settings screen does not appear when a Preset song is
selected.
Re se t Tim e : O FF, 0 .1 –8 .0 s (0 .1 se c ste p s)
fig.05-019_50
So n g Lo ck : O FF, O N
8 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ed itin g So n g s (SO N G Ed it)
N a m in g a So n g (So n g N a m e )
You can use up to eight characters when naming a User song.
Pa rt Se ttin g s (PART)
Set the backing parts (Parts 1–4) and percussion part in each
song.
Press [
] or [
] to move the cursor (under bar) to the
character you want to change, then press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -]
to select the character.
•
•
Changes made to a Preset song are only temporary, and
when you select a different song, the song reverts to its
predetermined part settings. If you want to save any
changes made to Preset song settings, first copy the song
to a User Song before making the changes (SONG/
The settings screen does not appear when a Preset song is
selected.
•
Holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [INC/ +] switches
through the following sequence: uppercase alphabet ■
lowercase alphabet ■ 0 ■ ! ■ space. Holding down
[SHIFT] and pressing [DEC/ -] switches through the
sequence in reverse order.
Settings of parts which have the Song Lock (SONG/
changed. Make the settings after setting this to “OFF.”
For the drum kit part settings, refer to Chapter 1.
•
•
Holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [
] deletes the
character at the cursor position and closes the resulting
space by shifting forward the characters that follow.
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
Holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [
] inserts a space
2 . Press [SONG], then [EDIT].
the character at the cursor position and shifts back the
characters that follow.
[SONG] and [EDIT] light.
3 . Press [
fig.05-021ai.e
] or [
] to select the part to be set.
fig.05-020_50
Part to set
Sn g N a m e (So n g N a m e ): 8 ch a ra cte rs
4 . Press [ENTER
].
] to select the parameter you
The following characters may be used.
fig.lettersai.e
5 . Press [
] or [
wish to edit.
fig.05-022ai.e
space
Parameter to set
6 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.05-023ai.e
Value
7 . When you finish making settings, press [SONG]
to end the procedure.
8 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ed itin g So n g s (SO N G Ed it)
Ch o o sin g Pe rcu ssio n Se t a n d
In stru m e n ts (Pe rcu ssio n Se t, In st)
Select a percussion set for the percussion part and instruments
for Parts 1–4.
Variation Tone:
This is a type of tone that varies slightly from that of the
instrument number. The number of variation tones varies
with the instrument number.
Pe rcu ssio n Pa rt
The TD-6 features ten Preset percussion sets that are ready to use.
fig.05-024ai.e
Capital sounds
Instrument Number
You cannot change the content of the Preset percussion sets.
To see which percussion sets can be selected here, refer to the
Instrument Name
Variation sounds
Display When a Variation
Tone is Used
Percussion Set:
A collection of a number of percussion instruments. A
different percussion instrument is assigned to each note
number, so multiple instruments can be used at one time.
Ba ck in g In st: 1 –1 2 8
fig.05-025ai.e
Ad ju stin g th e Pa rt Vo lu m e (Le ve l)
Percussion Set Number
Specifies the volume at each point. Raising the value will
increase the volume. With a setting of “0,” no sound is
produced.
Adjust here to balance the volume levels of the different parts.
Percussion Set Name
Se t (Pe rcu ssio n Se t): 1 –1 0
fig.05-026_50
Pa rts 1 –4
You can select all internal tones in sequence, including
variation tones.
LEVEL: 0 –1 2 7
You can switch instrument groups for the backing instruments
by holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -].
To see which backing instruments and instrument groups can
Instrument numbers correspond to the program numbers (1–
128).
8 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ed itin g So n g s (SO N G Ed it)
Ad ju stin g th e Ste re o Po sitio n (Pa n )
Adjusts the pan (the perceived location of the sound between
the left and right speakers).
Ad ju stin g th e Be n d Ra n g e
(Be n d Ra n g e )
This adjusts the degree to which the pitch of the sound is
changed when the maximum Pitch Bend is received from an
external MIDI device.
This can be set from “0” to “24” (two octaves) in semitone
steps. When set to “0,” no change is made.
The effect set here applies only when connected in stereo.
Percussion parts do not feature the Pan setting.
Percussion parts do not feature the Bend range setting.
fig.05-027_50
fig.05-029_50
Pa n : L1 5 –Ce n te r–R1 5
Be n d Ra n g e : 0 –2 4
L15:
CENTER: Sound is positioned in the center.
R15: Sound is positioned at the extreme right.
Sound is positioned at the extreme left.
Co p y in g a So n g (CO PY)
This is used to copy Preset songs and User songs to other User
songs.
Ad ju stin g th e Am o u n t o f Am b ie n ce
(Am b ie n ce Se n d Le ve l)
Part instruments and volume and other settings are copied
just as they are.
You can adjust the ambience level for each part individually.
The ambience effect deepens the higher the value is set. When
set to “0,” no ambience is applied.
Executing this operation deletes the content of the copy
destination, so check all content carefully before carrying out
this operation.
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
The specified ambience effect is applied to the currently
selected drum kit. To check how the effect sounds, select a
drum kit that has the Ambience Switch set to “ON.” (KIT/
2 . Press [SONG], then [EDIT].
[SONG] and [EDIT] light.
3 . Press [
fig.SONG-COPY_50
] to select “COPY.”
fig.05-028_50
4 . Press [ENTER
].
] to select the copy source
Am b Se n d Le ve l: 0 –1 2 7
5 . Press [
] or [
song.
fig.05-030ai.e
Copy source song
6 . Press [
].
The copy destination song selection screen appears.
9 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ed itin g So n g s (SO N G Ed it)
7 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select copy
De le tin g a So n g (DELETE)
destination song.
This deletes all of the song’s settings, turning the song into a
new User song.
You can select a song that has not yet been used by
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [STOP
]. New
User songs are indicated by “ ” in the display.
fig.05-031ai.e
2 . Press [SONG], then [EDIT].
[SONG] and [EDIT] light.
3 . Press [
fig.SONG-DEL_50
] to select “DELETE.”
Copy destination song
8 . Press [ENTER
].
Press [EXIT] to cancel the operation.
fig.05-032_50
4 . Press [ENTER
].
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the song to be
deleted.
fig.05-034ai.e
9 . Press [ENTER
] to execute the operation.
When you have finished copying the song, the
Completed screen appears.
fig.05-033_50
Song being deleted
6 . Press [ENTER
].
Press [EXIT] to cancel the operation.
fig.05-035_50
1 0 . When you finish copying, press [SONG] to end
the procedure.
Src (Co p y So u rce ): 1 –2 5 0
7 . Press [ENTER
] to execute the operation.
Dst (Co p y De stin a tio n ): 1 5 1 –2 5 0
When you have finished deleting the song, the
Completed screen appears.
fig.05-036_50
8 . When you finish deleting, press [SONG] to end
the procedure.
SO N G (De le te So n g ): 1 5 1 –2 5 0
9 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Ed itin g So n g s (SO N G Ed it)
SO N G (Era se So n g ): 1 5 1 –2 5 0
Era sin g Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta in
a So n g (ERASE)
Pa rt (Era se Pa rt):
ALL, KIT, PERC, PART1 , PART2 , PART3 , PART4
This erases the User song. Only the performance data is
erased, and the beat, measure length, parts, and the song’s
other settings are left intact. You can also erase specific parts.
ALL:
The performance data for all parts is erased.
KIT:
1 . Confirm that [CLICK] is not lit.
The performance data for the drum part is erased.
If this lights, press [CLICK] to extinguish it.
PERC:
The performance data for the percussion part is erased.
2 . Press [SONG], then [EDIT].
PART1:
[SONG] and [EDIT] light.
The performance data for Part 1 is erased.
PART2:
3 . Press [
fig.SONG-ERASE_50
] to select “ERASE.”
The performance data for Part 2 is erased.
PART3:
The performance data for Part 3 is erased.
PART4:
4 . Press [ENTER
].
The performance data for Part 4 is erased.
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the song to be
erased.
fig.05-037ai.e
Song being erased
6 . Press [
].
7 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the part to be
erased.
fig.05-038ai.e
Part being erased
8 . Press [ENTER
].
Press [EXIT] to cancel the operation.
fig.05-039_50
9 . Press [ENTER
] to execute the operation.
When you have finished erasing the song or part, the
Completed screen appears.
fig.05-040_50
1 0 . When you finish erasing, press [SONG] to end
the procedure.
9 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Re co rd in g a So n g
(Re a ltim e Re co rd in g )
Pa ra m e te rs Th a t Ca n Be Se t He re
fig.06-001.e
RECORDING STANDBY (Recording Settings) (p. 94)
Time Signature
Length
Re co rd in g Pe rfo rm a n ce s b y
Ex te rn a l MIDI De vice s
Tempo
Quantize
1 . Match the external MIDI device’s MIDI
transmission channel with the MIDI channel of
the part to be recorded.
Recording Mode
Hit Pad Start
What is played on the pads or on an external MIDI keyboard
can be recorded (Realtime Recording).
Part
Factory Preset
MIDI Channel
The performance of the hi-hat control pedal is also recorded.
Drum Kit Part
Percussion Part
Part 1
CH10
CH10
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
•
•
The amount that can be recorded to the TD-6 is limited.
Please keep in mind that even though there are 100 user
songs, the amount of memory available will be determined
by how much data is recorded into each song.
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
2 . Select CH10 to layer the drum kit part and
percussion part together; when recording from
an external MIDI device, then set “CH10Priority
(Channel 10 Priority)” to determine whether the
drum kit part or the percussion part is to be
recorded.
•
•
Recording the hi-hat control pedal performance data
consumes a large amount of memory. Make the settings
related to recording performance data in “PdlDataThin
(Pedal Data Thin)” (SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/
You can check the amount of available memory in
“AvailMemory (Available Memory)” (SETUP/ UTILITY/
You can select a new User song by holding down [SHIFT]
and pressing [STOP
] while in the Song screen.
New User songs are indicated by “ ” in the display.
Pre p a ra tio n s fo r Re co rd in g
Before starting to record, first make the MIDI, part, and other
such settings.
If there are no new User songs available, you can delete
W h e n Re co rd in g Pa d Pe rfo rm a n ce s
4 . Select the part instrument or percussion set to
Only the performance data is recorded to the drum kit part.
When the song is played back, the settings of instruments and
effects etc. of the current selected drum kit are used.
Program Change and Bank Select messages transmitted
from an external MIDI device are not recorded by the
sequencer. Use the TD-6 to select the part instruments.
You can select a new User song by holding down [SHIFT]
and pressing [STOP
] while in the Song screen.
5 . Make the other settings for the part to be
New User songs are indicated by “ ” in the display.
If there are no new User songs available, you can delete
9 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Re co rd in g a So n g (Re a ltim e Re co rd in g )
Se ttin g th e Tim e Sig n a tu re
(Tim e Sig n a tu re )
Ho w To Re co rd
(RECO RDIN G STAN DBY)
This specifies the beat of the song to be recorded.
1 . Prepare for recording using the procedure
The time signature cannot be changed when recording
additional material to a previously recorded song.
2 . Press [SONG] ■ [REC ].
[PLAY
] flashes, while [SONG], [REC
] and
[CLICK] light up.
fig.06-005_50
•
If a Preset song is selected when you press [REC
],
then a new User song is selected automatically. In this
case, new User songs that have Song Lock (SONG/
selected.
Tim e Sig (Tim e Sig n a tu re ):
1 –1 3 / 2 , 1 –1 3 / 4 , 2 –1 3 / 8 , 4 –1 3 / 1 6
•
•
If there are no new User songs available, delete any
Se ttin g th e N u m b e r o f Me a su re s
(Le n g th )
To cancel the recording, press [STOP
] or [EXIT].
3 . Press [
] or [
] to select the parameter you
This specifies the measure length in the song being recorded.
wish to edit.
fig.06-003ai.e
When “REPLACE” is specified as the recording mode
unnecessary. The recorded measure length is automatically
specified as the “Length.”
Parameter to set
4 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
fig.06-004ai.e
fig.06-006_50
Value
Le n g th : 1 –9 9 9
5 . Press [PLAY
] to begin recording.
[PLAY
begins.
] stops flashing and remains lit, and recording
Se ttin g th e So n g Te m p o (Te m p o )
This specifies the tempo used when recording and playing
back the song.
The following appears in the upper left of the screen
during recording.
fig.06-004aai
fig.06-007_50
To insert a count before recording, set “RecCountIn
Te m p o : 2 0 –2 6 0
6 . Play with pads or MIDI keyboards to record.
7 . Press [STOP ] to stop recording.
The [PLAY
] and [REC
] lights go out.
9 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Re co rd in g a So n g (Re a ltim e Re co rd in g )
Q u a n tize Du rin g Re co rd in g
(Q u a n tize )
“Quantize” is a function that corrects mistakes or
discrepancies in the timing of the performance being
recorded.
Se le ctin g th e Re co rd in g Me th o d
(Lo o p All, Lo o p 1 , Lo o p 2 , Re p la ce )
(Re co rd in g Mo d e )
Selects how recording will take place.
Timing problems almost always occur when recording
performances using pads, a MIDI keyboard, or other
instruments. This function corrects timing mistakes and
fig.06-010_50
allows you to make recordings with accurate timing.
fig.06-008.e
First beat
Second beat
Re cMo d e (Re co rd in g Mo d e ):
REPLACE, LO O P ALL, LO O P 1 , LO O P 2
REPLACE:
Recording continues until [STOP
] is pressed. All data
previously recorded in the all parts is erased.
LOOP ALL:
Actual performance
Recorded performance
The entire song repeats, and the new material is layered onto
the previous performance.
This is usually set to the shortest note appearing in the phrase
to be recorded. When set to “OFF,” the pattern is then
recorded with the timing used in performance.
LOOP1:
The measure starting from the point where recording begins is
repeated, and the new material is layered onto the previous
performance.
LOOP2:
Carry out the quantize when recording a song using Tap
Playback. You may be unable to play back the song correctly
with Tap Playback if quantize is set to “OFF” when the song is
recorded.
The two measures starting from the point where recording
begins are repeated, and the new material is layered onto the
previous performance.
fig.06-009_50
Sta rt Re co rd in g w ith a Pa d o r
Pe d a l Trig g e r (Hit Pa d Sta rt)
This function starts the recording process the instant you
strike a pad or pedal.
Q u a n tize :
(8 th n o te ),
(8 th n o te trip le ts),
(1 6 th n o te trip le ts),
(3 2 n d n o te trip le ts),
(1 6 th n o te ),
(3 2 n d n o te ),
(6 4 th n o te ), O FF
The “RecCountIn (Recording Count In)” setting is disregarded
fig.06-011_50
HitPa d Sta rt (Hit Pa d Sta rt): O FF, O N
9 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Ma k in g th e MIDI Se ttin g s
(SETUP/ MIDI, BULK DUMP)
MIDI O UT/ THRU Co n n e cto r Fu n ctio n
MIDI messages are transmitted from this connector to external
MIDI devices. The TD-6 transmits pad and sequencer
performance data from the MIDI OUT/ THRU connector. You
can also transmit various settings content, songs, and other
The TD-6 MIDI OUT and MIDI THRU connectors are
combined into a single connector. The function is selected in
the “Soft Thru” setting (SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ SOFT
sequencer performance data are transmitted to an external
device as is along with messages received at the MIDI IN
connector.
Pa ra m e te rs Th a t Ca n Be Se t He re
fig.07-005.e
SETUP
MIDI COMMON (MIDI Settings) (p. 97)
Note Chase
Local Control
Sync Mode
Channel 10 Priority
Pedal Data Thin
GM Mode
Rx GM ON
Soft Thru
Device ID
Tx PC Switch
Rx PC Switch
MIDI PART (MIDI Channel Settings for a Part) (p. 102)
As shipped from the factory, this is set to MIDI OUT.
GM PART
(MIDI Messages Stop Function in GM Mode) (p. 103)
BULK DUMP
(Saving Data to an External MIDI Device) (p. 103)
MIDI Ch a n n e ls a n d Mu lti-tim b ra l
So u n d Mo d u le s
Ab o u t MIDI
MIDI can send numerous streams of performance data over a single
MIDI cable. This is made possible by MIDI channels. MIDI channels
allow messages intended for a given instrument to be distinguished
from messages intended for another instrument. In some ways,
MIDI channels are similar to television channels. By changing
channels on a television you can view programs from many
different broadcast stations. This is because the television set has
thus been directed to selectively display only the information being
transmitted by a particular station. In the same way, MIDI also
allows a device to select the information intended for that device
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard
that allows performance data and other information to be
exchanged among electronic musical instruments and
computers. MIDI With a MIDI cable connecting MIDI devices
that are equipped with MIDI connectors, you can play
multiple instruments with a single keyboard, have multiple
MIDI instruments perform in ensemble, program the settings
to change automatically to match the performance as the song
progresses, and more.
While using only pads with the TD-6, there is no need to have
any detailed knowledge of MIDI. For those who wish to use
MIDI keyboards to record patterns on the TD-6, use it as a
sound module with external sequencers, or learn the TD-6 at a
more advanced level, the following explains such matters
related to MIDI.
out of the variety of information that is being transmitted to it.
fig.07-002.e
The cable from the antenna carries the TV
signals from many broadcast stations.
Station A
Station B
Station C
MIDI Co n n e cto rs
The TD-6 has the following two types of MIDI connectors.
fig.07-001
The TV is set to the channel of the station
you wish to watch.
There are sixteen MIDI channels, numbered 1–16. Set the receiving
device so that it will receive only the channel that it needs to receive.
Example:
Set the TD-6 to send Channel 1 and Channel 2, then set sound
module A to receive only Channel 1 and sound module B only
Channel 2. In this way, sound module A plays the guitar part
and sound module B plays the bass part.
MIDI IN Co n n e cto r Fu n ctio n
This receives MIDI messages transmitted from an external
MIDI device. When it receives MIDI messages, the TD-6
performs a variety of actions such as playing sounds and
switching drum kits and part instruments.
9 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Ma k in g th e MIDI Se ttin g s (SETUP/ MIDI, BULK DUMP)
fig.07-003.e
For playback, the performance data that has been recorded to
the sequencer is sent to the sound module, which produces
the sound. The data for each of the sequencer’s parts causes
the corresponding part in the internal sound module to be
played. When performance data is recorded, the performance
data from pads and MIDI keyboards is sent to the sequencer;
the data recorded here is then sent to the sound module for
playback.
MIDI OUT
MIDI
Keyboard
Transmit Channel: 1, 2
MIDI THRU
MIDI IN
Sound
Module A
When recording drum kit and percussion set performance, the
performance data is sent to the drum kit part and percussion
part according to the setting of channel 10 priority (SETUP/
Receive Channel: 1
MIDI IN
Sound
Module B
Receive Channel: 2
When used as a sound module, the TD-6 can receive on up to
six of the sixteen MIDI channels (16 channels in GM mode).
Sound modules like the TD-6 which can receive multiple MIDI
channels simultaneously to play different sounds on each
channel are called “multi-timbral sound modules.”
When using the TD-6 as a GM sound module, the internal
sequencer is disabled.
Ma k in g th e MIDI Se ttin g s
(MIDI CO MMO N )
Ho w th e In te rn a l Se q u e n ce r O p e ra te s
Make the TD-6’s MIDI settings.
A sequencer is an electronic instrument used for recording and
playback of performances. The TD-6 features such a sequencer
function. The TD-6 comes with 150 different built-in performance
songs (Preset songs) which can be used for drum practice and
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT
(SETUP)].
[EDIT] lights.
other purposes. You can also create your own songs.
fig.07-004.e
2 . Press [
fig.SETUP-MIDICMN_50
] to select “MIDI COMMON.”
External Sound Module
3 . Press [ENTER
].
] to select the parameter you
TD-6
4 . Press [
] or [
Internal Sequencer
Drum Kit Part
wish to edit.
fig.07-006ai.e
Pad
Percussion Part
Part 1
Parameter to set
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
MIDI Keyboard
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
fig.07-007ai.e
Value
6 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] or
[SONG] to end the procedure.
Internal
Sound Generator
9 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Ma k in g th e MIDI Se ttin g s (SETUP/ MIDI, BULK DUMP)
Au to m a tica lly Sw itch in g In stru m e n t
Se ttin g s Scre e n s (N o te Ch a se )
•
The settings screen does not appear in GM mode.
If you make connections and record as shown, with a
setting of Local On, duplicate notes will be re-transmitted
to the TD-6 and will not be played correctly.
Note Chase is a function in which a pad is selected either by
•
striking the pad or when MIDI data corresponding to that pad
is received.
When set to “OFF,” the pad’s settings screen is prevented
from switching, even when MIDI data for a pad is received.
Here, the trigger input number appears in brackets ([ ]).
fig.07-010_50
If you want to set other pads with this setting remaining at
“OFF,” you can switch settings screens by holding down [SHIFT]
and pressing
[
] or [
]
to select the trigger input number.
Lo ca lCo n tro l (Lo ca l Co n tro l): O FF, O N
fig.07-008_50
OFF:
The pads and internal sequencer are disconnected from the
TD-6’s internal sound generator. Striking the pads does not
cause sound to be produced by the internal sound generator.
ON:
N o te Ch a se : O FF, O N
The pads and internal sequencer are connected to the TD-6’s
internal sound generator. Sounds are produced by the internal
sound generator when the pads are struck.
W h e n Usin g a s MIDI Co n tro lle r fo r
Ex te rn a l MIDI De vice O n ly (Lo ca l Co n tro l)
This setting is required when you wish to record your pads and
internal sequencer performance on an external MIDI sequencer.
The performance data from the pads and internal sequencer,
rather than being sent directly to the sound module section (Local
Control Off), is first sent to the external sequencer, and then on to
Sy n ch ro n izin g w ith a n Ex te rn a l
MIDI De vice (Sy n c Mo d e )
This section discusses the settings that allow an external MIDI
sequencer and the TD-6’s sequencer to be synchronized. The
device that is playing back is called the “master” and the
device that is synchronizing to the playback is called the
“slave.”
the TD-6’s sound module.
fig.07-009.e
Pad
Trigger Input
TD-6
The settings screen does not appear in GM mode.
Internal
Sequencer
Trigger MIDI
Converter
fig.07-011_50
OUT/THRU
LocalControl:
OFF
IN
Sy n c Mo d e : IN T, EXT, REMO TE
INT (INTERNAL):
OUT
IN
The TD-6’s tempo setting is used in playback and recording.
EXT (EXTERNAL):
Internal Sound Generator
The TD-6’s sequencer operates in accord with external tempo
data.
REMOTE:
Playback begins, pauses, and stops in accord with data from
the external device, but the TD-6’s tempo setting is used for
the playback tempo.
External MIDI Sequencer
9 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Ma k in g th e MIDI Se ttin g s (SETUP/ MIDI, BULK DUMP)
Se ttin g Prio rity fo r Pla y in g Dru m s
a n d Pe rcu ssio n (Ch a n n e l 1 0 Prio rity )
The settings screen does not appear in GM mode.
This setting is necessary when both drum kit part and
percussion part are simultaneously assigned to Channel 10.
When note numbers to which percussion part’s instruments
are assigned (18 (F#0)–96 (C7)) are assigned to the pads, then
select which instrument sounds are to be played when the
note number is received.
fig.07-013_50
CH1 0 Prio rty (Ch a n n e l 1 0 Prio rity ): KIT, PERC
KIT (Drum Kit Part):
When overlapping note numbers are received, the drum kit
part’s instrument (the pad instrument) is sounded.
PERC (Percussion Part):
The percussion part’s instrument is always played.
is stored to the sounded part according to this setting.
fig.07-012.e
CH10
Hi-Ha t Co n tro l Pe d a l Da ta
Re d u ctio n (Pe d a l Da ta Th in )
This function allows you to prevent an excessive amount of
data from being transmitted from the pedal to the internal
sequencer or via the MIDI OUT.
Percussion
Part
Drum Kit
Part
Note No.
C3
48
49
50
51
52
Std 1 T2
4/TOM1
9/CRASH1
4/TOM1 Rim
11/RIDE
10/CRASH2 Rim
11/RIDE Rim
Med16 Cr
Std 1 T1
Pop Rd
China18”
Pop Rdb
Tambrn 1
Splsh12”
Cowbell1
Quik16Cr
VibraSlp
Pop Rde
R8Bng Hi
R8Bng Lo
Conga Mt
Conga Sl
Conga Op
53
54
9/CRASH1 Rim
10/CRASH2
55
56
57
58
59
When you want to make smooth changes in the pitch control
with the Hi-Hat control Pedal, set this to “1” or “OFF.”
C4
60
61
62
63
64
The settings screen does not appear in GM mode.
fig.07-014_50
CH10 Priority
Note No.
PERC
KIT
Pd lDa ta Th in (Pe d a l Da ta Th in ): O FF, 1 , 2
OFF:
C3
48
4/TOM1
Data sent from the pedal is not reduced.
Std 1 T2
Med16 Cr
Std 1 T1
Pop Rd
49
50
9/CRASH1
4/TOM1 Rim
11/RIDE
10/CRASH2 Rim
11/RIDE Rim
Tambrn 1
9/CRASH1 Rim
Cowbell1
10/CRASH2
VibraSlp
Pop Rde
R8Bng H
R8Bng Lo
Conga Mt
Conga Sl
1:
51
52
This reduces the data sent from the pedal. Usually, “1” is
China18”
Pop Rdb
Tambrn 1
Splsh12”
Cowbell1
Quik16Cr
VibraSlp
Pop Rde
R8Bng Hi
R8Bng Lo
Conga Mt
Conga Sl
Conga Op
selected.
53
54
2:
This reduces the data sent from the pedal. This setting results
in even less data than when “1” is selected.
55
56
57
58
59
C4
60
61
62
63
64
Conga Op
9 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Ma k in g th e MIDI Se ttin g s (SETUP/ MIDI, BULK DUMP)
Sw itch to th e GM (Ge n e ra l MIDI)
Mo d e (GM Mo d e )
While in GM mode, “
” appears in the drum kit screen.
The TD-6 features a GM mode—a convenient way to play
back GM score data (music files for General MIDI sound
module).
fig.07-015aai
fig.07-015_50
To ensure proper playback of GM scores, set the TD-6 to GM
mode.
Setting this to “ON” initializes the TD-6’s internal sound
generator for use with GM, while the GM System percussion
set (Standard Set) is assigned to Part 10, and Piano 1 is
assigned to all other parts.
GM Mo d e : O FF, O N
Pre ve n tin g th e TD-6 fro m Sw itch in g
to GM (Ge n e ra l MIDI) Mo d e
(Rx GM O N )
This setting prevents the TD-6 from switching to GM mode,
even when a “GM System ON message” is received from an
external MIDI device.
The TD-6 switches to GM mode at the following times.
•
•
When Switching to GM Mode
When it receives a GM System On message from an
external MIDI device
•
When the TD-6 has received a GM System On message as
the result of playing back a song containing a GM System
On message on an external MIDI device
fig.07-016_50
To mute the performance of a specific part in GM mode, you
can make the appropriate setting for “GM PART” (SETUP/
RX GM O N : O FF, O N
OFF:
•
You cannot use the TD-6 to make changes to the part
settings. Change the setting by sending the Control
Change Bank Select (CC0#, CC32#) and Program Change
(PC) from the external MIDI device.
Even when a “GM System ON message” is received, the TD-6
does not switch to GM mode. If you wish to switch to GM
mode, follow the procedures described on foregoing
paragraph to switch manually.
•
•
When the power is turned on, “GM Mode” is ordinarily
set to “OFF.”
ON:
When a “GM System ON message” is received, the TD-6
switches to GM mode.
Drum kit parts cannot be played using MIDI messages
sent from an external device. They can be played only by
playing pads connected to the TD-6.
•
Sequencers cannot be used in GM mode. The [SONG],
[PLAY
], [STOP
], [REC
], [CLICK], and [PART
GM Sy ste m O n Me ssa g e
MUTE] buttons are disabled. Also, [SHIFT] + [CLICK
(TEMPO)] cannot be used.
This is a message which switches a device to an operating
mode that is compatible with the GM system, or to
initialize a sound generator so that it will be compatible
with the GM system.
•
•
Some parameters cannot be set in GM mode. For more
Program changes in GM mode are predetermined, and
thus cannot be changed. Use the program changes in the
When “RX GM ON” is set to “OFF,” the GM System ON
message is ignored.
•
The pan of the percussion set is based on how the set
sounds from where the drums are played. Be aware that
the panning recommended with General MIDI is
reversed.
1 0 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Ma k in g th e MIDI Se ttin g s (SETUP/ MIDI, BULK DUMP)
Mix in g MIDI Sig n a ls Co m in g to th e
Se t th e De vice ID (De vice ID)
MIDI IN w ith Re a l Tim e Pe rfo rm a n ce
o n th e Pa d s (So ft Th ru )
This setting causes data (except for System Exclusive
messages) received at MIDI IN to be output from the MIDI
OUT/ THRU connector along with the pad and sequencer
The setting described here is necessary only when you wish to
transmit separate data to two or more TD-6 units at the same
time. Do not change this setting in any other case.
At the factory settings, the device ID is set to “17.”
Example:
performance data.
fig.07-016a.e
Pad
MIDI Compatible Pad
as the TD-6 Device ID. When re-transmitting this data back to
the TD-6, it won’t receive if the Device ID is set to something
other than “17.” Even if you happen to have another TD-6
connected, data will not be received if the Device ID is set to
something other than “17.”
fig.07-018.e (ID 16 17)
Transmit Data (Device ID:17)
Trigger
Input
OUT
OUT/THRU
IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
TD-6
External MIDI Sequencer
Soft Thru: ON
TD-6
Device ID: 17
External MIDI Sequencer
If this setting is not used, leave it “OFF” as the trigger
response of the pads will be faster.
MIDI IN
fig.07-017_50
Not Received
TD-6
Device ID: 16
So ft Th ru : O FF, O N
OFF:
Only pad and sequencer performance data is output from the
MIDI OUT/ THRU connector.
If you lose track of the Device ID setting that was used when
saving data via a bulk dump, it will no longer be possible to
reload the bulk data that was saved.
ON:
Data received at MIDI IN is output together with the pad and
sequencer performance data from the MIDI OUT/ THRU
connector.
fig.07-019_50
De vice ID: 1 –3 2
1 0 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Ma k in g th e MIDI Se ttin g s (SETUP/ MIDI, BULK DUMP)
messages are received from an external MIDI device.
Se ttin g th e TD-6 So Th a t Pro g ra m
Ch a n g e s Are N o t Tra n sm itte d (Tx PC Sw )
The TD-6 sends a Program Change message to external
devices when the drums kit is switched. If this is “OFF”,
Program Changes will not be transmitted.
ON:
The drum kits are switched when Program Change messages
are received from an external MIDI device.
MIDI Ch a n n e l Se ttin g s fo r a
Pa rt (MIDI PART)
The TD-6’s drum kit program numbers are always the same as
the drum kit numbers; this relationship is fixed, and cannot be
changed.
For each part, you can specify the channel on which the TD-6
will receive and transmit MIDI messages.
At a setting of “1” through “16,” MIDI messages will be
transmitted and received on that channel. When set to “OFF,”
MIDI messages for that part are not transmitted.
The settings screen does not appear in GM mode.
fig.07-020_50
Drum kit parts and percussion parts can be overlaid and set to
“CH 10.” Make the “CH10Priorty (Channel 10 Priority)”
setting to determine whether the drum kit part instrument or
percussion part instrument is to be sounded when MIDI
messages are received (SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/
Tx PC Sw (Tx PC Sw itch ): O FF, O N
OFF:
Program Change messages are not transmitted, even when
drums kits are switched.
ON:
thus cannot be changed.
Program Change messages are transmitted when drum kits
are switched.
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT
(SETUP)].
[EDIT] lights.
Se ttin g th e TD-6 So Th a t Pro g ra m
Ch a n g e s Are N o t Re ce ive d (Rx PC Sw )
2 . Press [
] to select “MIDI PART.”
fig.SETUP-MIDIPRT_50
The TD-6’s drum kits are switched when a Program Change
message is received from an external MIDI device. When set
to “OFF,” the drum kits do not switch, even when a Program
Change message is received.
When “GM Mode” is set to “ON,” “GM PART” is
displayed, and you cannot make the setting. Make the
setting after first setting “GM Mode” to “OFF” (SETUP/
The TD-6’s drum kit program numbers are always the same as
the drum kit numbers; this relationship is fixed, and cannot be
changed.
3 . Press [ENTER
4 . Press [ ] or [
].
] to select the part to be set.
The settings screen does not appear in GM mode.
fig.07-022ai.e
fig.07-021_50
Select Part
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
Rx PC Sw (Rx PC Sw itch ): O FF, O N
6 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] or
OFF:
[SONG] to end the procedure.
The drum kits are not switched, even when Program Change
1 0 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Ma k in g th e MIDI Se ttin g s (SETUP/ MIDI, BULK DUMP)
fig.07-023ai.e
Sa vin g Da ta to a n Ex te rn a l MIDI
De vice (BULK DUMP)
You can save the TD-6’s drum kits, songs, general settings,
and more to an external MIDI sequencer.
Value
use the external sequencer as you would when recording
Pa rt CH (Pa rt Tx Rx Ch a n n e l): CH 1 –CH1 6 , O FF
musical data, and perform the following steps on the TD-6 as
shown in the following diagram.
MIDI Me ssa g e s Sto p Fu n ctio n
fo r Sp e cific Pa rts in GM
(Ge n e ra l MIDI) Mo d e (GM PART)
Bulk Dump is one kind of System Exclusive message. Be sure
to use an external MIDI sequencer that is capable of recording
System Exclusive messages. In addition, confirm that the
sequencer is not set to “Do not receive System Exclusive
messages.”
In GM mode, you can make the setting that determines
whether or not MIDI messages are to be received for each
individual part.
When set to “OFF,” that part’s MIDI messages are not
received.
are connected.
1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT
(SETUP)].
[EDIT] lights.
2 . Press [
] to select “GM PART.”
fig.SETUP-GMPRT_50 (SETUP-MIDI PART)
For more detailed information concerning external MIDI
devices, be sure to read the owner’s manuals for the devices
you are using.
1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the TD-6’s MIDI
OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of the
external sequencer.
fig.07-026.e
When “GM Mode” is set to “OFF,” “MIDI PART” is displayed,
and you cannot make the setting.
Make the setting after first setting “GM Mode” to “ON”
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
3 . Press [ENTER
].
] to select the part to be set.
4 . Press [
] or [
fig.07-024ai.e
TD-6
External MIDI Sequencer
Select Part
2 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [EDIT
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to make the setting.
(SETUP)].
fig.07-025ai.e
[EDIT] lights.
3 . Press [
] to select “BULK DUMP.”
fig.SETUP-BULK_50 (SETUP-BULK DUMP)
Value
6 . When you finish making settings, press [KIT] to
end the procedure.
4 . Press [ENTER
].
Pa rt Rx Sw (Pa rt Rx Sw itch ): O FF, O N
1 0 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Ma k in g th e MIDI Se ttin g s (SETUP/ MIDI, BULK DUMP)
5 . Press [INC/+] or [DEC/-] to select the content to
Re tu rn in g Sa ve d Da ta to th e TD-6
This returns settings that have been saved to a sequencer or
other external MIDI device back to the TD-6.
be saved.
fig.07-027ai.e
At this time, the TD-6’s data is overwritten. Save any data you
need to an external MIDI device before carrying out this
operation.
Content being saved
6 . Start the recording process of the external
sequencer.
7 . Press [ENTER
].
Press [EXIT] to cancel the operation.
fig.07-028_50
1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the TD-6’s MIDI IN
connector to the MIDI OUT connector of the
external sequencer.
fig.07-031.e (IN -> OUT)
8 . Press [ENTER
] to start the data
transmission.
fig.07-029_50
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
9 . When you have finished transmitting, the
Completed screen appears.
fig.07-030_50
External MIDI Sequencer
TD-6
2 . Send the settings data from the external
sequencer to the TD-6.
1 0 . Stop recording on the external sequencer.
The transmitted settings are reproduced.
Bu lk Du m p :
ALL, SETUP, ALL SO N GS, ALL KITS,
KIT 0 1 –KIT 9 9
ALL:
All data, including the setup (trigger, pad, and other such
settings), drum kits, and User songs are transmitted.
SETUP:
All setup data is transmitted.
ALL SONGS:
All data for User Songs 151–250 is transmitted.
ALL KITS:
All data for Drum Kits 1–99 is transmitted.
KIT 01–KIT 99:
Only the data for the selected drum kit is transmitted.
1 0 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Fe a tu re s Usin g MIDI a n d Se ttin g Ex a m p le s
Ab o u t Tra n sm ittin g / Re ce ivin g
Pro g ra m Ch a n g e s
Trig g e rin g a n Ex te rn a l So u n d
De vice b y Pla y in g th e TD-6
This sets the TD-6 so that the external MIDI sound module is
sounded when the pads are struck.
Dru m Kit
The drum kit program numbers are always the same as the
drum kit numbers; this relationship is fixed, and cannot be
changed.
With this setting, both the TD-6 and the external sound
module can play simultaneously.
Pe rcu ssio n Se t
1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT
Percussion set program numbers are predetermined. Refer to
connector of the TD-6 to the MIDI IN connector
of the external MIDI device.
fig.08-001.e
Ba ck in g Pa rt (Pa rt 1 –4 ) In stru m e n ts
The instrument program numbers, and controller numbers 0
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
If tone changes are made on an external MIDI device, the TD-
6’s instruments are switched, but the change is not recorded
by the sequencer.
External MIDI Sound Module,
Sampler etc.
TD-6
2 . Match the MIDI channel to be used for
transmitting data from the TD-6 and the MIDI
channel that the external MIDI device will use
for receiving the data.
3 . Specify the note number to be transmitted from
Set this to the note number of the sound that you wish to
play on the external MIDI sound module or sampler.
4 . Set the MIDI Gate Time.
You can use different pad note number and gate time
settings in each drum kit.
1 0 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Fe a tu re s Usin g MIDI a n d Se ttin g Ex a m p le s
Co m b in in g w ith a n Ex te rn a l
MIDI Se q u e n ce r
You can select a new User song by holding down [SHIFT]
and pressing [STOP ] while in the Song screen.
Im p o rtin g Se q u e n ce Da ta fro m a n
Ex te rn a l MIDI De vice to th e TD-6 ’s
In te rn a l Se q u e n ce r
You can load data created on another sequencer from the
MIDI IN connector and record the data on the TD-6’s
sequencer, then use the data as a song. The backing part (Parts
1–4), percussion part, and drum kit part can be imported
simultaneously.
New User songs are indicated by “ ” in the display.
6 . Make the settings for the TD-6’s parts.
Specify the part instruments and percussion sets, volume
levels, etc.
7 . Press [REC ], then make the recording
Time Sig: Set the beat (time signature) to comply with
that of the loaded data.
Rec Mode:Set this to “REPLACE.”
When TD-6’s instruments are changed from an external MIDI
device, the change is not recorded by the TD-6’s sequencer.
Use the TD-6 to make each part’s instrument settings.
8 . Start playback of the external MIDI device.
The TD-6 automatically begins recording.
9 . When you have finished recording, stop the
recording of the external MIDI device.
The TD-6 stops recording automatically.
For more on external MIDI device operations, refer to the
owner’s manuals for the devices you are using.
1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI IN
Re co rd in g Yo u r Pe rfo rm a n ce to a n
Ex te rn a l Se q u e n ce r
connector of the TD-6 to the MIDI OUT
connector of the external MIDI device.
fig.08-002.e
This makes the settings that allow performances of the pads to
be recorded by an external MIDI sequencer.
1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the TD-6 and MIDI
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
sequencer MIDI connectors as shown in the
following figure.
fig.08-003.e
External MIDI Sequencer
TD-6
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
2 . Match the MIDI channel to be used for
transmitting data from the external MIDI device
and the MIDI channel that the TD-6 will use for
receiving the data.
TD-6
External MIDI Sequencer
3 . Set “CH10Priorty (Channel 10 Priority)” as
needed when recording drum and percussion
performances.
2 . Set Local Control to “OFF.”
3 . Match the MIDI channel to be used for
transmitting data from the TD-6 and the MIDI
channel that the external MIDI sequencer is to
use for receiving the data.
4 . Set “Sync Mode” to “EXT” in order to
synchronize the TD-6 to the external sequencer.
(SETUP/MIDI COMMON/Sync Mode)
1 0 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Fe a tu re s Usin g MIDI a n d Se ttin g Ex a m p le s
4 . Start the recording process of the external MIDI
5 . Make the settings for the TD-6’s parts.
sequencer.
Specify the part instruments and percussion sets, volume
levels, etc.
5 . The performances of the pads are recorded as
they are played.
6 . When you have finished playing, stop recording
with the external MIDI sequencer.
When using the TD-6 as a sound module, the sounds you
select must be assigned to a SONG as the song
parameters store which sounds you are using. Once you
select a new User song and make the settings, you can
then call up these settings just by selecting this song. You
can also prevent recording or changes to the settings by
setting “Song Lock” to “ON” (SONG/ COMMON/ Song
7 . When playback of the external MIDI sequencer
begins, the TD-6 is played.
Usin g th e TD-6 As a So u n d
Mo d u le
Here, the TD-6 is used as a sound module. You can connect an
external MIDI sequencer and play back songs or connect a
MIDI-compatible keyboard or pads for performance.
6 . When playing the external MIDI device, the TD-6
will sound.
1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI IN
connector of the TD-6 to the MIDI OUT
connector of the external MIDI device.
fig.08-004.e
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
TD-6
MIDI Keyboard, Pad
2 . Match the MIDI channel to be used for
transmitting data from the external MIDI device
and the MIDI channel that the TD-6 will use for
3 . Set “CH10Priorty (Channel 10 Priority)” as
needed when playing drum and percussion
performances with an external MIDI sequencer.
You can select a song that has not yet been used by
holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [STOP
].
New User songs are indicated by “ ” in the display.
1 0 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 0 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tro u b le sh o o tin g
This section outlines points to check if you experience
problems, and what to do about them.
■ Make sure that the pad connections are correct, and that
each pad is connected to the proper input.
N o So u n d
■ Use only the provided cables to connect the pads.
Is th e in stru m e n t se t to # 1 0 2 4 (O FF)?
N o So u n d
■ #1024 (OFF) is a setting used to prevent any sounds from
Ha s th e [VO LUME] b e e n lo w e re d ?
being played. Select an instrument numbered 1–1,023.
■ Rotate the [VOLUME] knob to be sure.
Is Lo ca l co n tro l se t to “ O FF? ”
Ca n n o t Ma k e Rim Sh o ts/
Rim Sh o ts N o t So u n d in g
■ Local Control should be set to “ON” if an external
Do y o u h a ve a p a d th a t is ca p a b le o f
p ro d u cin g rim sh o ts co n n e cte d to a trig g e r
in p u t th a t is ca p a b le o f h a n d lin g rim sh o ts?
sequencer is not being used.
N o Dru m Kit So u n d
■ When using the PD-80R or PD-120 to play rim shots,
Is th e o ve ra ll d ru m k it vo lu m e le ve l tu rn e d
connect to Trigger Input 2 (SNARE).
■ When using the PD-7, PD-9, CY-6, CY-12H, CY-14C, or CY-
15R to play rim shots (or edge/ bell shots) or choking,
connect to Trigger Input 2 (SNARE), 3 (HI-HAT), 4
(TOM1), 9 (CRASH1), 10 (CRASH2), or 11 (RIDE).
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to set the volume.
N o So u n d fro m O n e o r Mo re Pa d s
■ The PD-5, PD-6, PD-80, and PD-100 are not capable of
producing rim shots.
Is th e vo lu m e le ve l o f a n in stru m e n t lo w e re d ?
Is th e Rim Se n sitivity se t to “ 0 ? ” (SETUP/ TRIG
■ Strike the pad that is not producing sound to switch to the
pad’s settings screen. Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to set the
volume.
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
You need to set the “Rim Sens” when using the PD-80R or
PD-120 to play rim shots.
1 1 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tro u b le sh o o tin g
Ca n n o t Ma k e Cro ss Stick s/
Cro ss Stick s N o t So u n d in g
N o So u n d W h e n [SHIFT] + [KIT]
(Pre vie w ) Is Pre sse d
Do y o u h a ve a p a d co n n e cte d to a trig g e r
in p u t th a t is ca p a b le o f h a n d lin g cro ss stick s?
Is th e [PREVIEW ] b u tto n ve lo city se t to “ 0 ? ”
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
■ When using the PD-80R or PD-120 to play cross sticks,
connect to Trigger Input 2 (SNARE).
N o Click / Me tro n o m e So u n d
Ha s th e in stru m e n t th a t ca n b e u se d fo r
p la y in g th e cro ss stick s b e e n se le cte d ?
■ Press [CLICK] to light the button.
■ Use the instrument with the “XS.”
Is th e click vo lu m e le ve l se t to “ 0 ? ”
Are y o u p la y in g th e cro ss stick co rre ctly ?
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
■ For cross stick, make sure your hand or stick does not
touch or strike the head.
So n g Do e s N o t Pla y
Is GM Mo d e se t to “ O N ? ”
N o So u n d W h e n th e Pa d is Stru ck
So ftly
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to set this to “OFF.” The
sequencer does not function when the TD-6 is in GM mode.
Did y o u strik e a p a d o r p re ss th e p e d a l a t a n y
tim e fro m w h e n th e TD-6 ’s p o w e r w a s tu rn e d
o n u n til th e k it n a m e a p p e a re d in th e d isp la y ?
Are y o u p la y in g a n e w Use r so n g ?
■ Play back a song that contains performance data.
without playing any pads or pedals during the TD-6’s
warm up.
New User songs are indicated by “ ” in the display.
Is th e vo lu m e le ve l o f th e b a ck in g p a rt a n d
p e rcu ssio n p a rt se t to “ 0 ? ”
Precautions When Turning On the Power
When the TD-6 is turned on, it carries out a check of the
pads. If you strike a pad or press the pedal anytime during
this process, the pads cannot be checked properly,
resulting in incorrect functioning of the pads.
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
Press [SHIFT] + [SONG] to jump to the backing part
volume settings screen.
1 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tro u b le sh o o tin g
Sp e cific Pa rt in So n g N o t Be in g
Pla y e d
N o So u n d / Lo w vo lu m e fro m
De vice Co n n e cte d to th e MIX
IN Ja ck
■ Press [PART MUTE] so that the light is turned off.
Co u ld y o u b e u sin g a co n n e ctio n ca b le th a t
co n ta in s a re sisto r?
Is th e vo lu m e le ve l fo r e a ch p a rt se t to “ 0 ? ”
■ Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
Is th e vo lu m e le ve l o f th e co n n e cte d d e vice
tu rn e d d o w n co m p le te ly ?
TD-6 N o t Pla y in g Eve n Du rin g
Pe rfo rm a n ce o f Ex te rn a l Se q u e n ce r
o r Ke y b o a rd
■ Refer to the owner’s manual for the device, then set the
volume.
Is th e p a rt’s MIDI ch a n n e l co rre ct? O r is th e
ch a n n e l se t to “ O FF? ” (SETUP/ MIDI PART/ Pa rt
Dru m Kit Do e s N o t So u n d As
In te n d e d
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
Pre ssin g [SHIFT] + [KIT] (Pre vie w )
Sta rts Pla y b a ck o f th e So n g
Is th e vo lu m e le ve l fo r e a ch p a rt se t to “ 0 ? ”
Is th e Pa d Pa tte rn fu n ctio n (a fe a tu re th a t
sta rts p e rfo rm a n ce o f so n g s w h e n a p a d is
stru ck ) sp e cifie d fo r th e se le cte d p a d ?
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
Ex te rn a l Se q u e n ce r N o t Pla y in g
Eve n Du rin g Pe rfo rm a n ce o f TD-6
a n d Pa d s
■ Press [DEC/ -] to set this to “OFF.”
To stop playback of a song in progress, press [STOP
].
Is th e p a rt’s MIDI ch a n n e l co rre ct? O r is th e
ch a n n e l se t to “ O FF? ”
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
In GM m o d e , N o So u n d o f a
Sp e cific Pa rt in a Pe rfo rm a n ce
Is it se t n o t to re ce ive MIDI m e ssa g e s?
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
1 1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tro u b le sh o o tin g
N o Am b ie n ce Ap p lie d
Pa d Do e s N o t So u n d As
In te n d e d
Is th e d ru m k it’s Am b ie n ce se t to “ O FF? ”
Pa d N o t Pla y in g Co rre ctly
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
Is th e trig g e r ty p e se ttin g co rre ct?
Is th e d ru m k it’s o ve ra ll Am b ie n ce le ve l se t to
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
Is th e p a d ’s se n sitivity se ttin g co rre ct?
Ha s th e Am b ie n ce le ve l fo r in d ivid u a l
in stru m e n ts b e e n lo w e re d ?
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
■ Strike the pad to which Ambience is not being applied to
display the settings screen for that pad. Press [INC/ +] or
[DEC/ -] to make the setting.
For fullest expression in performance, we recommend the
exclusive use of Roland pads.
Is th e KD-8 0 , KD-1 2 0 , PD-8 0 , PD-8 0 R, PD-1 0 0
o r PD-1 2 0 h e a d tig h te n e d u n ifo rm ly ?
N o Eq u a lize r Ap p lie d
■ Refer to the owner’s manual for the pad you are using,
Is th e d ru m k it’s Eq u a lize r se t to “ O FF? ”
then adjust the head tension.
■ Press [INC/ +] to set this to “ON.”
If pad volume or other quality is unstable, making the head
tension somewhat tighter improve stability.
Is th e Ga in se t to “ 0 ? ”
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
W ro n g So u n d Pla y s
Is th e re a m ista k e in th e h e a d a n d rim
■ With some parameters, you can make separate settings for
the head and rim. At this time, confirm the trigger type
appearing in the upper right of the screen, then make the
settings.
■ To play rim shots, strike the head and rim simultaneously.
For cross stick, make sure your hand or stick does not
touch or strike the head.
1 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tro u b le sh o o tin g
So n g Do e s N o t So u n d As
In te n d e d
So u n d is d isto rte d
So u n d in He a d p h o n e s Disto rte d
So n g So u n d s O d d
So m e tim e s, se ttin g th e h e a d p h o n e o u tp u t to o
h ig h u sin g ce rta in to n e s ca n m a k e it a p p e a r
th a t th e so u n d is so m e w h a t d isto rte d .
Ha ve th e p a rt se ttin g s b e e n ch a n g e d ?
■ Turn down [VOLUME] completely. This alleviates the
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the settings.
distortion.
Pla y b a ck Sto p s Im m e d ia te ly Afte r
Be g in n in g
O u tp u t So u n d Is Disto rte d
Is th e so n g p la y b a ck ty p e se t to “ TAP? ”
So u n d s m a y b e co m e d isto rte d so m e w h a t
b e ca u se o f ce rta in in stru m e n t a n d e q u a lize r
se ttin g s.
■ Press [DEC/ -] to set this to “LOOP” or “1SHOT.”
“TAP” refers to the convenient playback function in Pad
Pattern (tapping the pad causes the song to be played
back).
■ Lower the pad’s instrument volume.
■ Setting the Pan (positioning) at or near the center may
Th e So n g Sto p s Su d d e n ly W h e n
Pla y in g th e Pa d s
Are y o u u sin g th e Pa d Pa tte rn fu n ctio n ?
When triggering/ playing a song that is set to “LOOP” or
“ONE SHOT” mode, if you trigger another song (from a
pad), also in “LOOP” or “ONE SHOT” mode then the last
song played will have priority. Don't forget that some
“songs” are very short, a few notes, or even one chord. So
“sudden” stops can be caused by accidently triggering one
of these short songs. Always check your Pad Pattern
settings.
1 1 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tro u b le sh o o tin g
Ca n n o t Ca rry O u t Bu lk Du m p
Pro b le m s O p e ra tin g th e TD-6
Is th e MIDI co n n e cto r u se d to co n n e ct th e MIDI
Strik in g Pa d s Do e s N o t Sw itch th e
Se ttin g s Scre e n
■ If you wish to save a bulk dump on an external device,
connect the TD-6’s MIDI OUT/ THRU connector to the
external sequencer’s MIDI IN connector.
Is th e p a d ’s se ttin g s scre e n lo ck e d ?
Co u ld th e e x te rn a l MIDI d e vice b e se t in su ch a
w a y a s to ca u se it to d e clin e th e re ce p tio n o f
MIDI Ex clu sive m e ssa g e s?
■ Press [INC/ +] to set this to “ON.”
■ Refer to the owner’s manual for the external MIDI device,
then set it so that the reception of System Exclusive data is
enabled.
You can press [SHIFT] + [
pads’ settings screens.
] or [
] to switch to other
So n g Scre e n N o t Disp la y e d
System exclusive data is data unique to individual devices,
so verify all settings.
Is GM Mo d e se t to “ O N ? ”
■ Press [DEC/ -] to set this to “OFF.” The sequencer does not
Disp la y Is To o Lig h t O r To o
Da rk
function when the TD-6 is in GM mode.
Is th e d isp la y co n tra st p ro p e rly a d ju ste d ?
Ca n n o t Re co rd o r Ed it Use r So n g
Is So n g Lo ck se t to “ O N ? ”
■ Press [INC/ +] or [DEC/ -] to make the setting.
■ Press [DEC/ -] to set this to “OFF.”
The visibility of the display will change depending on the
viewing angle and on room lighting conditions. The
visibility of the display will change depending on the
viewing angle and on room lighting conditions.
1 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Me ssa g e s a n d Erro r Me ssa g e s
This section explains the meaning of the various error
Ba ck u p Ba tte ry Lo w !
fig.e-004_50
messages and other messages that the TD-6 may display, and
describes the measures to take when these appear.
When [EXIT] appears as shown in the following figure, you
can press [EXIT] to dismiss the message.
fig.e-001_50
The internal backup battery of the TD-6 (a battery that
maintains data in the user memory) has run down.
Contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service center to have
the battery replaced.
Sy ste m a n d Ba tte ry Erro r
Me ssa g e s
Me ssa g e s a n d Erro r Me ssa g e s
Re la te d to Se q u e n ce rs a n d
So n g s
Sy ste m Erro r!
fig.e-002_50
DATA O VERLO AD!
fig.e-008_50
A problem has occurred with the internal system. Consult
your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center.
Song contained an excessive amount of data, and as a result
could not be output successfully from MIDI OUT.
Try eliminating a track that has too much data.
Ba ck u p N G! Ex e cu te Re se t All!
fig.e-003_50
9 9 9 Me a su re Ma x im u m !
fig.e-009_50
Data in the TD-6’s memory may be corrupted.
The TD-6’s internal backup battery (the battery used for
saving User memory data) is fully drained; internal data has
been lost.
The maximum number of measures for one song has been
exceeded, and as a result no more can be recorded to the song.
Consult your dealer or a nearby Roland service station to have
the battery replaced.
N o t En o u g h Me m o ry !
You can use the TD-6 temporarily by following the
instructions appearing in the display.
fig.e-010_50
1 . Press [ENTER
fig.e-003a_50
].
Song recording or editing could not be carried out because
there was not enough internal memory.
Try deleting songs that are no longer needed (SONG/
2 . Press [ENTER
] once again.
Factory Reset is executed, enabling you to use the TD-6
temporarily.
Ch a n g e s N o t Sa ve d ! Pre se t So n g !
fig.e-011_50
Carrying out a Factory Reset deletes all of the current TD-6’s
data and settings, and returns them to the original factory
settings.
This is a Preset song; changes to settings are not saved.
1 1 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Me ssa g e s a n d Erro r Me ssa g e s
So n g Lo ck O N !
Me ssa g e s a n d Erro r Me ssa g e s
Re la te d to MIDI
fig.e-012_50
Song Lock is on for this song; it cannot be edited or recorded.
MIDI O fflin e !
fig.e-005_50
Something has caused a break in communication with the
external MIDI device.
Em p ty So n g !
fig.e-013_50
Check that MIDI cables have not been disconnected or broken.
This song contains no performance data; it cannot be edited.
Ch e ck su m Erro r!
fig.e-006_50
N o Em p ty So n g !
fig.e-014_50
The checksum value of a system exclusive message was
incorrect.
Correct the checksum value.
There are no empty songs for recording.
Try deleting songs that are no longer needed (SONG/
MIDI Bu ffe r Fu ll!
fig.e-007_50
N e w Use r So n g Se le cte d !
fig.e-015_50
A large amount of MIDI messages were received, and could
not be processed completely.
Confirm that the external MIDI device is properly connected
amount of MIDI messages being transmitted to the TD-6.
Select a new User song automatically.
This is displayed when the following operations are carried
out.
Da ta Tra n sm ittin g ... Ple a se , W a it.
fig.e-017_50
•
When pressing [SHIFT] + [STOP
] in the song screen
or the screen for selecting the copy destination in song
copy
Bulk data is being transmitted in response to an external
request for transmission.
•
When [REC
] is pressed with a Preset song selected
Bu lk Da ta Tra n sm it Ab o rte d !
Pre se t So n g !
fig.e-018_50
fig.e-015_50
The bulk dump has been cancelled.
This is the preset song; the settings cannot be changed.
Da ta Re ce ivin g ... Ple a se , W a it.
fig.e-019_50
Bulk data is being received. Do not turn off the power.
1 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m Kit List
No.
Drum Kit Name
Remark
No.
Drum Kit Name
Remark
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
HevyRock
DenkiRok
"A" Team
Rocker X
HardRock
HevyMetl
RokCncrt
JazzOne
B-Bop X
BIG Band
Sizzle
1
AcuStick
Rock It!
Groove
2
3
* x-stick
4
Jazzy
* x-stick
* x-stick
5
Ballad X
TR-808
6
7
Brushes
Tekno
8
* x-stick
9
LatnPerc
Orch Set
HipHop
* Pad Pattern
(SNR_H, CR1_R)
* Pad Pattern
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
(KIK, CR1_R, AUX)
BrushAmb
BrshSwel
Electro
TR-909
JazzFunk
Syn&Bass
1ManBand
DryTight
Guitars
Mexi-Mix
DrumSolo
Voices
* Pad Pattern
(KIK, CR1_H/ R, CR2_H, RD_H)
* Pad Pattern
(KIK, CR1_R, CR2 _R)
808Mix
* Pad Pattern
(HH_H)
909Mix
808...9!
Dance808
Snowki
* Pad Pattern
(KIK, T1_H, T2, T3, T4)
* Pad Pattern
Natural
Crack!
(CR1_R)
LazyPlat
Jungle
Fusion
ElecBoom
ElecMix
Slip
Buzz
TKO
PowrFusn
Pocket
Drum'nBs
HomeBoy
Far Away
"Scat"
* Pad Pattern
(CR2_H/ R)
Studio1
Dry
Ringer
Dome
RockBand
* Pad Pattern
(T4, AUX)
1 1 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m Kit List
No.
Drum Kit Name
Remark
No.
Drum Kit Name
Remark
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Club
JzTheatr
TileRoom
Garage
GigaHall
Cave
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
SteelSnr
BrassSnr
BelBrSnr
JunkYard
BrikHous
OpenLoFi
Lazy
* x-stick
Timbongo
LowFi
Cartoon
Studio2
Studio3
PopKit X
Standrd1
Standrd2
Room
Scary
Fibre
Birch
* x-stick
RoseWood
Oyster
Melody
Kids
Power
Gospel
PedalEFX
Gate
Jazz
Tabla
* Pad Pattern
(CR1_R, RD_H)
LatnSqnc
User Kit
* Pad Pattern
(CR1_R, CR2_R)
Science!
CopprSnr
No.:
Drum Kit Number (Program Number)
* x-stick:
A velocity switching “snare rim” sound, that when played softly produces a cross stick sound, and when played harder
produces a rim shot sound.
When using the PD-80R or PD-120 for snare (trigger input 2), you can play using the cross stick technique.
*Pad Pattern:
(KIK = Kick, SNR = Snare, HH = Hi-Hat, T = Tom, CR = Crash, RD = Ride, H = Head, R = Rim)
No.92 Standard–96 Jazz:
This kit has the instruments in each percussion set assigned to the pads.
No.99 User Kit:
Parameters including volume etc. are set to standard values.
Use this when creating a kit from scratch.
You can restore an edited drum kit to its factory settings. For more information, refer to “Restoring the Factory Settings
1 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m In stru m e n t List
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
SandBagK
BsktBalK
Mondo K
MdVrb1 K
MdVrb2 K
Sizzle K
196 AcusBrRS
197 AcusSt S
198 AcusStRS
199 VintageS
200 Vntg RS
201 VntgBr S
202 VntgBrRS
203 VntgSt S
204 VntgStRS
SNARE
No. Name
Remark
130 Custom S
131 Cstm RS
132 CstmBr S
133 CstmBrRS
134 CstmSt S
135 CstmStRS
136 Picolo1S
137 Pco1 RS
138 Pco1Br S
139 Pco1BrRS
140 Pco1St S
141 Pco1StRS
142 Picolo2S
143 Pco2 RS
144 Pco2Br S
145 Pco2BrRS
146 Pco2St S
147 Pco2StRS
148 Picolo3S
149 Pco3 RS
150 Pco3Br S
151 Pco3BrRS
152 Pco3St S
153 Pco3StRS
154 Medium1S
155 Med1 RS
156 Med1 XS *x-stick
157 Med1Br S
158 Med1BrRS
159 Med1BrXS *x-stick
160 Med1St S
161 Med1StRS
162 Med1StXS *x-stick
163 Medium2S
164 Med2 RS
165 Med2Br S
166 Med2BrRS
167 Med2St S
168 Med2StRS
169 Medium3S
170 Med3 RS
171 Med3Br S
172 Med3BrRS
173 Med3St S
174 Med3StRS
175 Medium4S
176 Med4 RS
177 Med4Br S
178 Med4BrRS
179 Med4St S
180 Med4StRS
KICK
1
DblHeadK
Box
K
2
3
Sharp K
Acous K
Ninja K
Dance K
House K
Pillow K
4
Meat
K
205 Comp
S
5
6
7
R8 Low K
R8 Dry K
WdBeatrK
206 Comp RS
207 CompBr S
208 CompBrRS
209 CompSt S
210 CompStRS
Rap
K
TR808 K
808HardK
808BoomK
808NoizK
TR909 K
909WoodK
909HdAtK
ElephntK
Cattle K
8
Open
K
9
VintageK
26"DeepK
ThickHdK
Round K
Medium K
BigRoomK
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
211 Jazz
S
212 Jazz RS
213 Jazz XS *x-stick
214 JazzBr S
215 JazzBrRS
216 JazzBrXS *x-stick
217 JazzSt S
218 JazzStRS
219 JazzStXS *x-stick
220 Dirty S
221 Drty RS
Big
K
BigLow K
Studio1K
Studio2K
Studio3K
Studio4K
Studio5K
Studio6K
Studio7K
Studio8K
Buzz 1 K
Buzz 2 K
Buzz 3 K
Buzz 4 K
Buzz 5 K
Room 1 K
Room 2 K
Room 3 K
Room 4 K
Room 5 K
Room 6 K
Room 7 K
Amb 1 K
Amb 2 K
Amb 3 K
Amb 4 K
Solid1 K
Solid2 K
Solid3 K
Jazz 1 K
Jazz 2 K
18"JazzK
BrshHitK
Wood 1 K
Wood 2 K
Wood 3 K
Wood 4 K
Maple1 K
Maple2 K
Door
K
Punch K
MachineK
Broken K
BendUp K
HrdNoizK
R8SolidK
ThinHedK
Tight K
Chunk K
222 DrtyBr S
223 DrtyBrRS
224 DrtySt S
225 DrtyStRS
226 13"
227 13"
S
RS
Gate
K
Giant K
Inside K
Std1 1 K
Std1 2 K
228 Birch S
229 Birch RS
230 TD7Mpl S
231 TD7MplRS
232 Ballad S
233 Brush1 S
234 Brush2 S
235 Brush3 S
236 Brsh Tap
237 Brsh Slp
238 Brsh Swl
239 BrshTmbS
240 MIDIBr1S
241 MIDIBr2S
242 MIDIBr3S
243 Boston S
244 BostonRS
245 Bronze S
246 Brnz RS
247 Bronze2S
248 Brnz2 RS
249 Birch2 S
250 Copper S
251 Copper2S
100 Std2 1 K
101 Std2 2 K
102 Room 8 K
103 Room 9 K
104 Power K1
105 Power K2
106 Jazz 3 K
107 Jazz 4 K
108 Brush K
109 Elec 1 K
110 Elec 2 K
111 ElBend K
112 Plastk1K
113 Plastk2K
114 Gabba K
115 Gabba2 K
116 Tail
K
181 Fat1
S
117 Jungle K
118 HipHop K
119 LoFi 1 K
120 LoFi 2 K
121 LoFi 3 K
122 LoFi 4 K
123 Noisy K
124 Splat K
125 Scrach1K
126 Scrach2K
182 Fat1 RS
183 Fat1Br S
184 Fat1BrRS
185 Fat1St S
186 Fat1StRS
252 10"
253 L.A.
S
S
254 London S
255 Ring
256 Ring RS
257 Rock
Oak
K
187 Fat2
S
S
Birch K
RoseWodK
OnePly K
Oyster K
188 Fat2 RS
189 Fat2Br S
190 Fat2BrRS
191 Fat2St S
192 Fat2StRS
193 AcusticS
194 Acus RS
195 AcusBr S
S
258 Rock RS
259 R8MapleS
260 R8Mpl RS
261 BigShotS
262 Std1 1 S
263 Std1 2 S
127 Hi-Q
128 Space K
129 SynBassK
K
Dry
K
DryMed K
DryHardK
DeepDryK
Fusion K
1 2 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m In stru m e n t List
264 Std2 1 S
265 Std2 2 S
266 Room 1 S
267 Room 2 S
268 Power1 S
269 Power2 S
333 Fibre T1
334 Fibre T2
335 Fibre T3
336 Fibre T4
337 Dry1 T1
338 Dry1 T2
339 Dry1 T3
340 Dry1 T4
341 Dry2 T1
342 Dry2 T2
343 Dry2 T3
344 Dry2 T4
345 Maple T1
346 Maple T2
347 Maple T3
348 Maple T4
349 Rose T1
350 Rose T2
351 Rose T3
352 Rose T4
353 SakuraT1
354 SakuraT2
355 SakuraT3
356 SakuraT4
357 Jazz1 T1
358 Jazz1 T2
359 Jazz1 T3
360 Jazz1 T4
361 Jazz2 T1
362 Jazz2 T2
363 Jazz2 T3
364 Jazz2 T4
365 Buzz1 T1
366 Buzz1 T2
367 Buzz1 T3
368 Buzz1 T4
369 Buzz2 T1
370 Buzz2 T2
371 Buzz2 T3
372 Buzz2 T4
373 Buzz3 T1
374 Buzz3 T2
375 Buzz3 T3
376 Buzz3 T4
377 Buzz4 T1
378 Buzz4 T2
379 Buzz4 T3
380 Buzz4 T4
381 NatralT1
382 NatralT2
383 NatralT3
384 NatralT4
385 Natrl2T1
386 Natrl2T2
387 Natrl2T3
388 Natrl2T4
389 StudioT1
390 StudioT2
391 StudioT3
392 StudioT4
393 Slap T1
394 Slap T2
395 Slap T3
396 Slap T4
397 Room1 T1
398 Room1 T2
399 Room1 T3
400 Room1 T4
401 Room2 T1
402 Room2 T2
403 Room2 T3
404 Room2 T4
405 Room3 T1
406 Room3 T2
407 Room3 T3
408 Room3 T4
409 Room4 T1
410 Room4 T2
411 Room4 T3
412 Room4 T4
413 Room5 T1
414 Room5 T2
415 Room5 T3
416 Room5 T4
477 Bowl T1
478 Bowl T2
479 Bowl T3
480 Bowl T4
481 Dirty T1
482 Dirty T2
483 Dirty T3
484 Dirty T4
485 Std 1 T1
486 Std 1 T2
487 Std 1 T3
488 Std 1 T4
489 Std 1 T5
490 Std 1 T6
491 Std 2 T1
492 Std 2 T2
493 Std 2 T3
494 Std 2 T4
495 Std 2 T5
496 Std 2 T6
497 Room6 T1
498 Room6 T2
499 Room6 T3
500 Room6 T4
501 Room6 T5
502 Room6 T6
503 Power T1
504 Power T2
505 Power T3
506 Power T4
507 Power T5
508 Power T6
509 Jazz3 T1
510 Jazz3 T2
511 Jazz3 T3
512 Jazz3 T4
513 Jazz3 T5
514 Jazz3 T6
515 Brsh3 T1
516 Brsh3 T2
517 Brsh3 T3
518 Brsh3 T4
519 Brsh3 T5
520 Brsh3 T6
521 Gate T1
522 Gate T2
523 Gate T3
524 Gate T4
525 LoFi T1
526 LoFi T2
527 LoFi T3
528 LoFi T4
529 ElBendT1
530 ElBendT2
531 ElBendT3
532 ElBendT4
533 ElBnd2T1
534 ElBnd2T2
535 ElBnd2T3
536 ElBnd2T4
537 ElBnd3T1
538 ElBnd3T2
539 ElBnd3T3
540 ElBnd3T4
541 ElNoisT1
542 ElNoisT2
543 ElNoisT3
544 ElNoisT4
545 ElDualT1
546 ElDualT2
547 ElDualT3
548 ElDualT4
270 Gate
S
271 Jazz 2 S
272 Jazz 3 S
273 Funk
S
274 Funk RS
275 Bop
276 Bop
S
RS
417 Big
418 Big
419 Big
420 Big
T1
T2
T3
T4
277 Picolo5S
278 Pco5 RS
279 Picolo6S
280 Pco6 RS
281 Medium5S
282 Med5 RS
283 Medium6S
284 Med6 RS
285 Medium7S
286 Med7 RS
287 Medium8S
288 Med8 RS
421 Rock T1
422 Rock T2
423 Rock T3
424 Rock T4
425 Punch T1
426 Punch T2
427 Punch T3
428 Punch T4
429 Oak
430 Oak
431 Oak
432 Oak
T1
T2
T3
T4
289 Fat3
290 Fat3 RS
291 Fat4
S
S
292 Fat4 RS
293 DynamicS
294 Dynmc RS
433 Balsa T1
434 Balsa T2
435 Balsa T3
436 Balsa T4
437 VintgeT1
438 VintgeT2
439 VintgeT3
440 VintgeT4
441 Brsh1 T1
442 Brsh1 T2
443 Brsh1 T3
444 Brsh1 T4
445 Brsh2 T1
446 Brsh2 T2
447 Brsh2 T3
448 Brsh2 T4
449 Dark T1
450 Dark T2
451 Dark T3
452 Dark T4
453 AttackT1
454 AttackT2
455 AttackT3
456 AttackT4
457 Hall T1
458 Hall T2
459 Hall T3
460 Hall T4
461 Birch T1
462 Birch T2
463 Birch T3
464 Birch T4
465 Beech T1
466 Beech T2
467 Beech T3
468 Beech T4
469 Micro T1
470 Micro T2
471 Micro T3
472 Micro T4
473 Bend T1
474 Bend T2
475 Bend T3
476 Bend T4
295 Roll
296 Buzz
S
S
297 Dopin1 S
298 Dopin2 S
299 Reggae S
300 Cruddy S
301 Dance1 S
302 Dance2 S
303 House S
304 HousDpnS
305 Clap! S
306 Whack S
307 TR808 S
308 TR909 S
309 Elec 1 S
310 Elec 2 S
311 Elec 3 S
312 ElNoiz S
313 HipHop1S
314 HipHop2S
315 LoFi
S
316 LoFi RS
317 Radio S
318 CrsStk 1
319 CrsStk 2
320 CrsStk 3
321 CrsStk 4
322 CrsStk 5
323 CrsStk 6
324 808Crstk
TOM
325 OysterT1
326 OysterT2
327 OysterT3
328 OysterT4
329 Comp T1
330 Comp T2
331 Comp T3
332 Comp T4
1 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m In stru m e n t List
613 Splsh12"
750 Baya Gin
751 Baya Sld
752 Pot Drum
753 PotDr Mt
754 PotDr VS
755 TalkinDr
756 ThaiGong
757 ThaiGng2
758 BellTree
759 TinyGong
760 Gong
PERCUSSION
No. Name
Remark
614 Cup
615 Cup
4"
6"
680 R8Bng Hi
681 R8Bng Lo
682 R8Bng2Hi
683 R8Bng2Lo
684 Bongo Hi
685 Bongo Lo
686 Bongo2Hi
687 Bongo2Lo
688 R8Cng Mt
689 R8Cng Hi
690 R8Cng Lo
691 Conga Mt
692 Conga Sl
693 Conga Op
694 Conga Lo
695 CngMt VS
696 CngSl VS
697 Cowbell1
698 Cowbell2
699 CowblDuo
700 Claves
701 GiroLng1
702 GuiroSht
703 GiroLng2
704 Guiro VS
705 Maracas
706 Shaker
707 SmlShakr
708 Tambrn 1
709 Tambrn 2
710 Tambrn 3
711 Tambrn 4
712 Tmbl1 Hi
713 Tmbl1 Rm
714 Tmbl1 Lo
715 Paila
716 Tmbl2 Hi
717 Tmbl2 Lo
718 VibraSlp
719 Agogo Hi
720 Agogo Lo
721 Agogo2Hi
722 Agogo2Lo
723 CabasaUp
724 CabasaDw
725 CabasaVS
726 CuicaMt1
727 Cuica Op
728 Cuica Lo
729 CuicaMt2
730 PandroMt
731 PandroOp
732 PandroSl
733 PandroVS
734 SurdoHMt
735 SurdoHOp
736 SurdoHVS
737 SurdoLMt
738 SurdoLOp
739 SurdoLVS
740 Whistle
741 Whisl Sh
742 Caxixi
549 Elec T1
550 Elec T2
551 Elec T3
552 Elec T4
553 Elec T5
554 Elec T6
555 TR808 T1
556 TR808 T2
557 TR808 T3
558 TR808 T4
559 TR808 T5
560 TR808 T6
616 HdSpl 8"
617 HdSpl10"
618 China10"
619 China12"
620 China18"
621 China20"
622 SzlChina
623 SwlChina
624 PgyzBack
625 PgyCrsh1
626 PgyCrsh2
627 PgyCrsh3
628 PgSplsh1
629 PgSplsh2
630 PhaseCym
631 Elec Cr
632 TR808 Cr
633 LoFi1 Cr
634 LoFi2 Cr
761 TemplBel
762 Wa-Daiko
763 Taiko
764 Sleibell
765 TreeChim
766 TringlOp
767 TringlMt
768 TringlVS
769 R70TriOp
770 R70TriMt
771 R70TriVS
772 Castanet
773 WdBlk Hi
774 WdBlk Lo
775 ConcrtBD
776 ConBD Mt
777 Hand Cym
778 HndCymMt
779 TimpaniG
780 TimpaniC
781 TimpaniE
782 PercHit1
783 PercHit2
784 Orch Maj
785 Orch Min
786 Orch Dim
787 Kick/Rol
788 Kick/Cym
789 OrchRoll
790 OrchChok
791 Hit Roll
792 Finale
793 808Clap
794 808Cwbl1
795 808Cwbl2
796 808Marcs
797 808Clavs
798 808Conga
799 909RIM
800 909CLAP
801 78Cowbel
802 78Guiro
803 78GiroSt
804 78Maracs
805 78MBeat
806 78Tambrn
807 78Bongo
808 78Claves
809 78Rim
HI-HAT
561 Pure HH
562 PureEgHH
563 BrightHH
564 BritEgHH
565 Jazz HH
566 JazzEgHH
567 Thin HH
568 ThinEgHH
569 Heavy HH
570 HevyEgHH
571 Light HH
572 LigtEgHH
573 Dark HH
574 DarkEgHH
575 12"
576 12"Eg HH
577 13" HH
578 13"Eg HH
579 14" HH
580 14"Eg HH
581 15" HH
582 15"Eg HH
583 Brush1HH
584 Brush2HH
585 SizzleHH
586 Sizle2HH
587 Voice HH
588 HandC HH
589 TambrnHH
590 MaracsHH
591 TR808 HH
592 TR909 HH
593 CR78 HH
594 Mtl808HH
595 Mtl909HH
596 Mtl78 HH
597 LoFi1 HH
598 LoFi2 HH
RIDE
635 Jazz Rd
636 Jazz RdE
637 Jazz RdB
638 Jazz RdX *Bow/Bell
639 Pop Rd
640 Pop RdE
641 Pop RdB
642 Pop RdX *Bow/Bell
643 Rock Rd
644 Rock RdE
645 Rock RdB
646 Rock RdX *Bow/Bell
647 Lite Rd
648 Lite RdE
649 Lite RdB
650 Lite RdX *Bow/Bell
651 CrashRd
652 CrashRdE
653 DkCrsRd
654 DkCrsRdE
655 Brsh1 Rd
656 Brsh2 Rd
657 SzlBr Rd
658 Szl1 Rd
659 Szl1 RdE
660 Szl1 RdB
661 Szl1 RdX *Bow/Bell
662 Szl2 Rd
663 Szl2 RdE
664 Szl2 RdB
665 Szl2 RdX *Bow/Bell
666 Szl3 Rd
667 Szl3 RdE
668 Szl3 RdB
669 Szl3 RdX *Bow/Bell
670 Szl4 Rd
671 Pgy Rd1
672 Pgy Rd1B
HH
CRASH
599 Med14 Cr
600 Med16 Cr
601 Med18 Cr
602 Quik16Cr
603 Quik18Cr
604 Thin16Cr
605 Thin18Cr
606 Brsh1 Cr
607 Brsh2 Cr
608 SzlBr Cr
609 Swell Cr
610 Splsh 6"
611 Splsh 8"
612 Splsh10"
810 55Claves
SPECIAL
811 Applause
812 Encore
813 Bird
673 Pgy Rd1X *Bow/Bell
674 Pgy Rd2
675 Pgy Rd2B
676 Pgy Rd2X *Bow/Bell
677 LoFi Rd
678 LoFi RdE
743 Tabla Na
744 TablaTin
745 TablaTun
746 Tabla Te
747 Tabla Ti
748 Baya Ge
749 Baya Ka
814 Dog
815 Bubbles
816 Heart Bt
817 Telephon
818 Punch
679 LoFi RdB
1 2 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m In stru m e n t List
819 KungFoo
820 Pistol
821 Gun Shot
822 Glass
823 Hammer
824 Bucket
874 Boing 1
875 Boing 2
876 TeknoBrd
877 Nantoka!
878 ElecBird
879 MtlBend1
880 MtlBend2
881 MtlNoise
882 MtlPhase
883 Laser
884 Mystery
885 TimeTrip
886 Kick Amb
887 SnareAmb
888 Tom Amb
924 Haa!
925 SayYeah!
926 Yeah
927 Ahhh
928 Haaa
929 Achaa!
930 Nope!
931 Bap
932 Dat
977 RvsCrsh1
978 RvsCrsh2
979 RvsChina
980 RvsBelTr
981 Rvs Hi-Q
982 RvsMFaze
983 RvsAirDr
984 RvsBoin1
985 RvsBoin2
986 Rvs Bend
987 RvsVocod
988 RvsCarcl
989 RvsEngin
825 Barrel
826 TrashCan
827 Af Stomp
828 Bounce
933 BapDatVS
934 Doot
829 CuicaHit
830 Monster
831 AirDrive
832 Car Door
833 Car Cell
834 CarEngin
835 Car Horn
836 Helicptr
837 Thunder
838 Bomb
935 DaoFall1
936 DaoFall2
937 DaoFall3
938 DaoFall4
939 DoDat VS
940 DoDao VS
941 Scat1 VS
942 Scat2 VS
943 Scat3 VS
944 Scat4 VS
945 Scat5 VS
946 Voice K
947 VoiceLoK
948 Voice S
949 Voice T1
950 Voice T2
951 Voice T3
952 Voice T4
953 Voice Cr
954 Count 1
955 Count 2
956 Count 3
957 Count 4
958 Count 5
959 Count 6
960 Count 7
961 Count 8
962 Count 9
963 Count 10
964 Count 11
965 Count 12
966 Count 13
967 CountAnd
968 Count E
969 Count A
970 Count Ti
971 Count Ta
FIXED HI-HAT
990 Std1 CH
991 Std1 ECH
992 Std1 OH
993 Std1 EOH
994 Std1 PdH
995 Std2 CH
996 Std2 ECH
997 Std2 OH
998 Std2 PdH
999 Room CH
1000 Room ECH
1001 Room OH
1002 Room EOH
1003 Room PdH
1004 Powr CH
1005 Powr ECH
1006 Powr OH
1007 Powr PdH
1008 Brsh CH
1009 Brsh ECH
1010 Brsh OH
1011 Brsh PdH
1012 Elec CH
1013 Elec OH
1014 Elec PdH
MELODIC
889 Kalimba
890 Steel Dr
891 Glcknspl
892 Vibraphn
893 Marimba
894 Xylophon
895 Tublrbel
896 Celesta
897 Saw Wave
898 TB Bass
899 SlapBass
900 Gt Slide
901 GtScrach
902 GuitDist
903 GuitBs 1
904 GuitBs 2
905 CutGtDwn
906 CutGtUp
907 FletNoiz
908 Bs Slide
909 WahGtDw1
910 WahGtUp1
911 WahGtDw2
912 WahGtUp2
913 Shami VS
914 Brass VS
915 StrngsVS
916 Pizicato
917 TeknoHit
918 FunkHit1
919 FunkHit2
920 FunkHit3
839 Sticks
840 Click
841 Tamb FX
842 Tek Clik
843 Beep Hi
844 Beep Low
845 MetroBel
846 MetroClk
847 Snaps
848 Clap
849 NoizClap
850 Tek Noiz
851 Mtl Slap
852 R8 Slap
853 Vocoder1
854 Vocoder2
855 Vocoder3
856 DynScrch
857 Scrach 1
858 Scrach 2
859 Scrach 3
860 Scrach 4
861 Scrach 5
862 Scrach 6
863 ScrchLP
864 Phil Hit
865 LoFi Hit
866 Hi-Q
1015 808
1016 808 ECH
1017 808 OH
CH
1018 808 EOH
1019 808 PdH
1020 LoFi CH
1021 LoFi OH
1022 LoFi EOH
1023 LoFi PdH
867 Hoo...
868 DaoDrill
869 Scrape
870 Martian
871 CoroCoro
872 CoroBend
873 Burt
REVERSE
972 RvsKick1
973 RvsKick2
974 RvsSnr 1
975 RvsSnr 2
976 RvsTom
VOICE
921 Lady Ahh
922 Aoouu!
923 Hooh!
OFF
1024 OFF
*x-stick (XS):
A velocity switching “snare rim” sound, that when played softly produces a cross stick sound, and when played
harder, produces a rim shot sound.
*Bow/Bell (RdX):
A “cross-faded” type of sounds. With velocity, you can control “bow” and “bell” sound.
RS:
Rim shot sound
VS:
Velocity switching sound
Inst Group “FIXED HI-HAT”:
These are hi-hat sounds that cannot be controlled by the FD-7 (optional) foot controller.
1 2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pre se t Pe rcu ssio n Se t List
1. Stndard 1
PC100 Voices
2. Stndard 2
PC101
3. Room
PC102
4. Power
PC103
5. Electronic
PC104
6. 808/909
PC105
Note No.
18
Bs Slide
GtScrach
Gt Slide
CutGtDwn
CutGtUp
WahGtDw1
WahGtUp1
WahGtDw2
WahGtUp2
Hi-Q
Mtl Slap
Scrach 3
Scrach 2
Sticks
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
3
1
4
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
0
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
19
20
21
22
23
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
C1 24
←
←
←
←
←
25
27
←
←
←
←
←
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
30
32
34
←
←
←
←
←
Click
←
←
←
←
←
MetroClk
MetroBel
Std1 2 K
Std1 1 K
CrsStk 3
Std1 1 S
Clap
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
Std2 2 K
Room 9 K
Power K2
Elec 2 K
Elec 1 K
CrsStk 3
Elec 1 S
←
TR909 K
Std2 1 K
Room 8 K
CrsStk 1
Room 1 S
Power K1
TR808 K
808Crstk
TR808 S
808Clap
TR909 S
TR808 T6
808 ECH
TR808 T5
808 PdH
TR808 T4
808 EOH
TR808 T3
TR808 T2
TR808 CR
TR808 T1
C2
←
←
37
39
Std2 1 S
Power1 S
←
←
←
Std1 2 S
Std 1 T6
Std1 CH
Std 1 T5
Std1 PdH
Std 1 T4
Std1 EOH
Std 1 T3
Std 1 T2
Med16 Cr
Std 1 T1
Pop Rd
China18"
Pop RdB
Tambrn 1
Splsh12"
Cowbell1
Quik16Cr
VibraSlp
Pop RdE
R8Bng Hi
R8Bng Lo
Conga Mt
Conga Sl
Conga Op
Tmbl1 Rm
Tmbl1 Lo
Agogo Hi
Agogo Lo
CabasaUp
Maracas
Whisl Sh
Whistle
GuiroSht
GiroLng1
Claves
WdBlk Hi
WdBlk Lo
CuicaMt1
Cuica Op
TringlMt
TringlOp
Shaker
Sleibell
BellTree
Castanet
SurdoLMt
SurdoLOp
OFF
R8Cng Hi
TinyGong
Gong
PandroMt
PandroOp
PandroSl
TreeChim
Caxixi
Std2 2 S
Room 2 S
Power2 S
Gate
Elec T6
Elec CH
Elec T5
Elec PdH
Elec T4
Elec OH
Elec T3
S
Std 2 T6
Std2 CH
Std 2 T5
Std2 PdH
Std 2 T47
Std2 OH
Std 2 T3
Std 2 T2
Room6 T6
Room CH
Room6 T5
Room PdH
Room6 T4
Room EOH
Room6 T3
Room6 T2
Power T6
Powr CH
Power T5
Powr PdH
Power T4
Powr OH
Power T3
Power T2
42
44
46
Elec T2
C3 48
50
←
←
←
←
49
51
Std 2 T1
Room6 T1
Power T1
Elec T1
Jazz Rd
Pop Rd
Jazz Rd
Pop Rd
RvsCrsh2
Pop RdB
←
52
←
←
←
China18”
Jazz RdB
Pop RdB
Jazz RdB
←
53
←
←
←
←
←
←
78Tambrn
54
56
58
←
←
←
55
Cowbell2
←
←
Cowbell1
808Cwbl1
57
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
59
Jazz RdE
←
Pop RdE
←
Jazz RdE
←
Pop RdE
←
←
78Bongo
C4 60
62
←
←
←
←
78Bongo
808Conga
808Conga
808Conga
61
63
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
64
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
65
←
←
←
←
←
66
68
70
←
←
←
←
←
67
←
←
←
←
←
69
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
808Marcs
71
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
C5 72
74
←
←
←
←
78GiroSt
73
75
←
←
←
←
78Guiro
808Clavs
←
←
←
←
76
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
77
←
←
←
←
78
80
82
←
←
←
←
79
←
←
←
←
81
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
83
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
C6 84
86
←
←
←
←
85
87
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
88
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
89
←
←
←
←
90
92
94
←
←
←
←
91
←
←
←
←
93
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
95
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
C7 96
1 2 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pre se t Pe rcu ssio n Se t List
7. Jazz
PC106
8. Brush
PC107
9. Perc Only
PC108
10. Special
PC109
Mute
Drum Kit
Note Numbers
The note numbers assigned
to each trigger inputs
Note No.
18
Bs Slide
GtScrach
Gt Slide
CutGtDwn
CutGtUp
WahGtDw1
WahGtUp1
WahGtDw2
WahGtUp2
Hi-Q
Mtl Slap
Scrach 3
Scrach 2
Sticks
←
R8Bng2Hi
R8Bng2Lo
Bongo Hi
Bongo Lo
Bongo2Hi
Bongo2Lo
R8Cng Mt
R8Cng Hi
R8Cng Lo
CowblDuo
Tambrn 2
Tambrn 3
Tmbl2 Hi
Tmbl2 Lo
Paila
Tabla Na
TablaTin
TablaTun
Tabla Te
Tabla Ti
Baya Ge
Baya Ka
Baya Gin
Baya Sld
Pot Drum
PotDr Mt
TalkinDr
ThaiGng2
TinyGong
Gong
FunkHit2
FunkHit2
FunkHit2
FunkHit2
FunkHit3
FunkHit3
FunkHit3
FunkHit3
FunkHit1
FunkHit1
FunkHit1
FunkHit1
TeknoHit
TeknoHit
TeknoHit
TeknoHit
Heart Bt
Glass
←
19
20
21
22
23
←
←
←
TRIG 3 (HI-HAT)CLOSE RIM
TRIG 3 (HI-HAT)OPEN RIM
←
←
C1 24
←
25
27
←
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
←
←
←
←
30
32
34
←
TRIG 8 (TOM4)
TRIG 6 (AUX)
Click
←
MetroClk
MetroBel
Jazz 4 K
Jazz 3 K
CrsStk 3
Jazz 2 S
Clap
←
←
Std2 2 K
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Brush K
Pistol
TRIG 1 (KICK1)
TRIG 2 (SNARE)
C2
←
ScrchLP
Phil Hit
LoFi Hit
Boing 1
Monster
Count
Count
Count
Count
Count
37
39
Brsh Tap
Brsh Slp
Brsh Swl
Brsh3 T6
Brsh CH
Brsh3 T5
Brsh PdH
Brsh3 T4
Brsh OH
Brsh3 T3
Brsh3 T2
Brsh1 Cr
Brsh3 T1
Jazz 3 S
Jazz3 T6
Std1 CH
Jazz3 T5
Std1 PdH
Jazz3 T4
Std1 EOH
Jazz3 T3
Jazz3 T2
Med16 Cr
Jazz3 T1
Jazz Rd
China18"
Jazz RdB
Tambrn 1
Splsh12"
Cowbell2
Quik16Cr
VibraSlp
Jazz RdE
R8Bng Hi
R8Bng Lo
Conga Mt
Conga Sl
Conga Op
Tmbl1 Rm
Tmbl1 Lo
Agogo Hi
Agogo Lo
CabasaUp
Maracas
Whisl Sh
Whistle
GuiroSht
GiroLng1
Claves
WdBlk Hi
WdBlk Lo
CuicaMt1
Cuica Op
TringlMt
TringlOp
Shaker
Sleibell
BellTree
Castanet
SurdoLMt
SurdoLOp
OFF
R8Cng Hi
TinyGong
Gong
PandroMt
PandroOp
PandroSl
TreeChim
Caxixi
TRIG 2 (SNARE) RIM
TRIG 7 (TOM3)
TRIG 3 (HI-HAT) CLOSED
42
44
46
TRIG 3 (HI-HAT) PEDAL
TRIG 5 (TOM2)
TRIG 3 (HI-HAT) OPEN
Bomb
TemplBel
Wa-Daiko
Taiko
Thunder
Car Door
Car Cell
CarEngin
Car Horn
Helicptr
Gt Slide
GtScrach
GuitDist
GuitBs 1
GuitBs 2
FletNoiz
Shami VS
Brass VS
StrngsVS
StrngsVS
StrngsVS
Pizicato
RvsKick1
RvsSnr 2
RvsCrsh2
RvsChina
Lady Ahh
Aoouu!
TRIG 4 (TOM1)
C3 48
50
TRIG 9 (CRASH1)
TRIG 4 (TOM1) RIM
TRIG 11 (RIDE)
TRIG 10 (CRASH2) RIM
TRIG 11 (RIDE) RIM
49
51
Brsh1 Rd
R70TriOp
R70TriMt
TimpaniG
TimpaniG
TimpaniG
TimpaniG
TimpaniG
TimpaniC
TimpaniC
TimpaniC
ThaiGong
ThaiGong
ThaiGong
ThaiGong
PercHit1
PercHit2
Orch Maj
Orch Min
Orch Dim
Kick/Rol
Kick/Cym
OrchRoll
OrchChok
Hit Roll
Finale
52
←
←
53
←
54
56
58
←
TRIG 9 (CRASH1) RIM
TRIG 10 (CRASH2)
55
*
*
*
←
57
Brsh1 Cr
←
Jazz Rd
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
59
C4 60
62
PC: Program Number
←: Same as the left
Voices:
61
63
64
65
Number of voice used
*: Note number for muted
drum sounds when
muting only the drum
instruments of the
percussion part.
66
68
70
67
69
71
Hooh!
Haa!
SayYeah!
Yeah
Ahhh
Haaa
Achaa!
Nope!
Bap
C5 72
74
73
75
76
Applause
Encore
77
TreeChim
808Clap
808Cwbl1
808Cwbl2
808Marcs
808Clavs
808Conga
909RIM
909CLAP
78Cowbel
78Guiro
78GiroSt
78Maracs
78MBeat
78Tambrn
78Bongo
78Claves
78Rim
78
80
82
In GM Mode, “Standard
1” is assigned.
79
81
Dat
Scat3 VS
Doot
83
DaoFall1
DaoFall2
DaoFall3
DaoFall4
DoDat VS
DoDat VS
DoDat VS
DoDao VS
Scat1 VS
Scat2 VS
Scat2 VS
Scat2 VS
Scat4 VS
C6 84
86
85
87
88
89
90
92
94
91
93
95
55Claves
C7 96
1 2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ba ck in g In stru m e n t List
20
0
8
16
Church Org.1
Church Org.2
Church Org.3
1
2
2
SYN. BASS
PC CC0 Name
PIANO
Voices
39
0
1
Synth Bass 1
SynthBass101
Synth Bass 3
TB303 Bs 1
TB303 Bs 2
TB303 Bs 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
21
22
0
Reed Organ
1
8
0
8
Accordion Fr
Accordion It
2
2
64
65
66
1
0
8
16
Piano 1
Piano 1w
Piano 1d
1
2
1
23
24
0
0
Harmonica
Bandoneon
1
2
40
0
16
64
65
66
67
Synth Bass 2
Rubber Bass
SH101 Bs 1
SH101 Bs 2
SH101 Bs 3
Modular Bass
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
0
8
Piano 2
Piano 2w
1
2
GUITAR
0
8
Piano 3
Piano 3w
1
2
25
26
0
Nylon-str.Gt
1
0
8
Honky-tonk
Honky-tonk w
2
2
0
8
64
Steel-str.Gt
12-str.Gt
Nylon+Steel
1
2
2
ORCHESTRA
E. PIANO
41
0
8
Violin
Slow Violin
1
1
27
28
29
0
8
Jazz Gt.
Hawaiian Gt.
1
1
5
0
8
E.Piano 1
1
2
1
2
2
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Viola
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Detuned EP 1
60’s E.Piano
FM+SA EP
0
8
Clean Gt.
Chorus Gt.
1
2
24
64
65
Cello
0
64
65
66
67
0
Muted Gt.
Muted Gt.2
Pop Gt.
1
2
1
1*
1*
1
Contrabass
Tremolo Str
PizzicatoStr
Harp
Hard Rhodes
6
0
E.Piano 2
Bright FM EP
2
2
64
Funk Gt.
Funk Gt.2
Overdrive Gt
Fdbk.Odrv.Gt
30
31
CLAVI
7
64
2
Timpani
0
8
64
65
66
67
DistortionGt
Feedback Gt.
Heavy Gt.
Fdbk. Hvy.Gt
Muted Dis.Gt
Rock Rhythm
1
2
1
2
1
2
0
8
Harpsichord
Coupled Hps.
Harpsi.w
1
2
2
2
STRINGS
16
24
Harpsi.o
49
0
8
Strings
Orchestra
1
2
8
0
Clav.
Funk Clav.
1
2
64
50
51
0
Slow Strings
1
32
0
8
Gt.Harmonics
Gt. Feedback
1
1
0
8
64
65
Syn.Strings1
Syn.Strings3
Syn.Strings4
OB Strings
1
2
2
2
CHROMATIC PERCUSSION
*: VELOCITY SWITCH
The tone switches at velocity 116.
9
0
0
0
Celesta
1
1
1
10
11
12
Glockenspiel
Music Box
52
53
0
Syn.Strings2
2
BASS
33
0
32
Choir Aahs
Choir Aahs 2
1
1
0
8
Vibraphone
Vib.w
1
2
0
64
Acoustic Bs.
Elctrc.Ac.Bs
2
2
54
55
56
0
0
0
Voice Oohs
SynVox
1
1
2
13
14
15
0
0
Marimba
1
1
34
35
0
64
65
Fingered Bs.
Funk Bass
Reggae Bass
1
2
2
Xylophone
OrchestraHit
0
8
9
Tubular-bell
Church Bell
Carillon
1
1
1
0
64
65
Picked Bs.
Mute PickBs1
Mute PickBs2
1
1
1
BRASS
57
58
0
Trumpet
1
16
0
Santur
1
36
37
0
Fretless Bs.
1
0
1
Trombone
Trombone 2
1
2
0
64
65
66
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 3
Reso Slap
1
1
1
1
ORGAN
59
60
61
0
0
Tuba
1
1
17
0
Organ 1
1
2
1
2
1
2
MutedTrumpet
Slap Bass 4
8
16
32
64
65
Detuned Or.1
60's Organ 1
Organ 4
SC88 Organ 4
Even Bar
0
1
French Horn
Fr.Horn 2
2
2
38
0
Slap Bass 2
1
62
0
8
Brass 1
Brass 2
1
2
18
19
0
8
32
Organ 2
Detuned Or.2
Organ 5
1
2
2
0
Organ 3
2
1 2 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ba ck in g In stru m e n t List
118
119
0
8
Melo. Tom 1
Melo. Tom 2
1
1
SYN. BRASS
SYN. PAD
63
0
8
Synth Brass1
Synth Brass3
AnalogBrass1
Synth Brass5
Poly Brass
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
89
90
0
Fantasia
2
0
8
9
Synth Drum
808 Tom
Elec Perc.
1
1
1
0
64
65
Warm Pad
Thick Pad
Horn Pad
1
2
2
16
64
65
66
67
120
0
Reverse Cym.
1
Quack Brass
Octave Brass
91
0
Polysynth
80's PolySyn
2
2
64
GUITAR BASS FX
64
0
8
16
64
65
66
Synth Brass2
Synth Brass4
AnalogBrass2
Soft Brass
Velo Brass 1
Velo Brass 2
2
1
2
2
2
2
92
93
94
0
0
Space Voice
Bowed Glass
1
2
121
0
1
64
65
66
67
Gt.FretNoise
Gt.Cut Noise
Wah Brush Gt
Gt. Slide
Gt. Scratch
Bass Slide
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Metal Pad
Panner Pad
2
2
64
95
96
0
Halo Pad
2
0
64
65
Sweep Pad
Polar Pad
Converge
1
1
1
REED
SFX
122
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Soprano Sax
Alto Sax
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
Breath Noise
Fl.Key Click
1
1
SYN. SFX
Tenor Sax
Baritone Sax
Oboe
123
0
1
2
3
5
Seashore
Rain
Thunder
Wind
1
1
1
1
2
97
98
0
Ice Rain
2
0
64
65
Soundtrack
Ancestral
Prologue
2
2
2
Bubble
English Horn
Bassoon
124
125
0
1
3
Bird
Dog
Bird 2
2
1
1
99
0
1
Crystal
Syn Mallet
2
1
Clarinet
100
101
102
103
0
0
0
Atmosphere
Brightness
Goblin
2
2
2
0
1
3
5
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
Door
1
1
1
2
PIPE
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Piccolo
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
Wind Chimes
0
1
Echo Drops
Echo Bell
Echo Pan
Echo Pan 2
Big Panner
Reso Panner
1
2
2
2
2
2
Flute
126
0
2
9
Helicopter
Car-Stop
Burst Noise
Space Tri.
1
1
2
1
2
Recorder
Pan Flute
Bottle Blow
Shakuhachi
Whistle
64
65
66
64
127
128
0
3
Applause
Punch
2
1
104
0
Star Theme
2
0
2
3
Gun Shot
Lasergun
Explosion
1
1
2
ETHNIC MISC
Ocarina
105
0
1
Sitar
Sitar 2
1
2
SYN. LEAD
106
107
108
0
0
Banjo
1
1
PC:
CC:
Program Number
81
0
1
8
Square Wave
Square
Sine Wave
2
1
1
Shamisen
(Instrument Number)
Value of control change
number 0
0
8
Koto
Taisho Koto
1
2
82
0
1
8
64
65
Saw Wave
Saw
Doctor Solo
Big Lead
Waspy Synth
2
1
2
2
2
109
110
111
112
0
0
0
0
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
Shanai
1
1
1
1
Voices: Number of voices used
83
84
85
0
0
Syn.Calliope
Chiffer Lead
2
2
•
•
To switch instruments from the
external MIDI device, send “0”
on the CC32# (Control Change
Bank Select) from the external
MIDI device to the TD-6.
0
64
65
66
Charang
2
2
2
2
PERCUSSIVE
Dist. Lead 1
Dist. Lead 2
Funk Lead
113
114
115
116
0
0
0
Tinkle Bell
Agogo
1
1
1
86
87
0
Solo Vox
2
Steel Drums
The value of the CC32# (Control
Change Bank Select) that the
TD-6 transmits is always “0.”
0
64
5th Saw Wave
Big Fives
2
2
0
8
Woodblock
Castanets
1
1
88
0
64
65
Bass & Lead
Big & Raw
Fat & Perky
2
2
2
117
0
8
Taiko
Concert BD
1
1
1 2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pre se t So n g List
No.
Name
Time Sig Length Tempo Type
No.
Name
Time Sig Length Tempo Type
DRUMS
BLUES
1
DRUMS
4/4
8
124 LOOP
35 BLUES1
36 BLUES2
37 BLUES3
4/4
4/4
4/4
30
36
21
67 1SHOT
113 1SHOT
55 1SHOT
ROCK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8BT’ROK1
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
36
30
24
26
32
20
29
33
35
31
30
22
20
48
38
114 1SHOT
140 1SHOT
109 1SHOT
126 1SHOT
100 1SHOT
72 1SHOT
113 1SHOT
100 1SHOT
105 1SHOT
86 1SHOT
129 1SHOT
195 1SHOT
100 1SHOT
216 1SHOT
175 1SHOT
POPS
8BT’ROK2
MED ROK
SHFL ROK
FUNK ROK
SLOW ROK
URBAN
38 BGM POP
39 REFRESH
40 DANCEPOP
41 POP ROCK
42 ACOUSPOP
43 70’S POP
44 ELEC POP
45 POP WLTZ
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
3/4
27
25
25
38
20
32
21
26
88 1SHOT
89 1SHOT
120 1SHOT
123 1SHOT
89 1SHOT
215 1SHOT
100 1SHOT
120 1SHOT
UPBEAT
10 TRIPLETS
11 16BT’ROK
12 CYBER
13 HARDROCK
14 FNKYHR
15 BOOGIE
16 HARD POP
R&R
46 ROCKABLY
47 ROCKIN’
48 SURF ROK
4/4
4/4
4/4
21
32
24
96 1SHOT
170 1SHOT
150 1SHOT
METAL
COUNTRY
17 EARLYMTL
18 SPEED1
19 SPEED2
20 THRASH
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
24
27
41
32
120 1SHOT
182 1SHOT
236 1SHOT
195 1SHOT
49 BLUEGRSS
50 CNTRYBLD
51 CNTRYROK
4/4
4/4
4/4
22
36
37
142 1SHOT
105 1SHOT
125 1SHOT
JAZZ
52 SWING1
53 SWING2
54 JAZZ WLZ
55 JAZZ BLD
56 LATINJAZ
57 6/8 JAZZ
58 SMTHJAZZ
59 BIGBAND
BALLAD
21 6/8BLD
22 POPBLD
23 ROCK BLD
24 PIANOBLD
25 16BT’BLD
4/4
4/4
3/4
4/4
4/4
6/8
4/4
4/4
39
37
51
42
37
35
39
32
200 1SHOT
192 1SHOT
110 1SHOT
110 1SHOT
167 1SHOT
93 1SHOT
183 1SHOT
130 1SHOT
6/8
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
28
24
24
15
29
50 1SHOT
65 1SHOT
64 1SHOT
65 1SHOT
75 1SHOT
R&B
26 OLD R&B1
27 OLD R&B2
28 OLD R&B3
29 OLD R&B4
30 R&B SHFL
31 R&B HOP1
32 R&B HOP2
33 SMTH GRV
34 SHFL GRV
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
27
28
25
22
23
35
42
24
26
154 1SHOT
148 1SHOT
150 1SHOT
82 1SHOT
112 1SHOT
96 1SHOT
93 1SHOT
73 1SHOT
96 1SHOT
FUSION
60 ACID FS
61 SLOW FS
62 MED SHFL
63 UP SHFL
64 FUNK FS1
65 FUNK FS2
66 3/4 FS
67 BGM FS
68 CTMP’FS
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
3/4
4/4
4/4
29
22
27
37
41
24
46
25
25
96 1SHOT
85 1SHOT
86 1SHOT
130 1SHOT
120 1SHOT
112 1SHOT
123 1SHOT
82 1SHOT
100 1SHOT
1 2 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pre se t So n g List
No.
Name
Time Sig Length Tempo Type
No.
Name
Time Sig Length Tempo Type
DANCE
LOOP
69 HIPHOP
70 EUROBEAT
71 HOUSE
72 FUNK1
73 FUNK2
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
37
35
34
24
23
25
20
24
24
24
23
24
90 1SHOT
132 1SHOT
122 1SHOT
105 1SHOT
113 1SHOT
102 1SHOT
102 1SHOT
125 1SHOT
86 1SHOT
96 1SHOT
118 1SHOT
82 1SHOT
111 LATN PTN
112 CLAVES
113 TABLA
4/4
4/4
4/4
2
1
2
120 LOOP
120 LOOP
128 LOOP
1SHOT
74 FUNK3
114 DRUMFILL
115 DBL BASS
116 ROLL T1
117 ROLL T2
118 ROLL T3
119 LATNFILL
120 ROLLBNGO
121 SPANISH
122 BRS FALL
123 ENCORE
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
7
120 1SHOT
130 1SHOT
130 1SHOT
130 1SHOT
130 1SHOT
120 1SHOT
117 1SHOT
123 1SHOT
120 1SHOT
120 1SHOT
75 808HPHOP
76 JAZZFUNK
77 ACIDFUNK
78 HPHPJAZZ
79 TEKPOP
80 DRUM’NBS
REGGAE
81 REGGAE1
82 REGGAE2
83 REGGAE3
84 REGGAE4
85 SKA
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
22
29
20
24
27
96 1SHOT
142 1SHOT
132 1SHOT
125 1SHOT
192 1SHOT
TAP
124 SAMBA
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
1
4
5
2
2
1
16
6
4
1
2
3
3
8
2
3
3
1
1
8
6
1
1
2
1
5
3
120 TAP
160 TAP
160 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
60 TAP
100 TAP
130 TAP
130 TAP
130 TAP
128 TAP
128 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
80 TAP
125 ACO BASS
126 BRS SECT
127 GRV BASS
128 GRV PAD
129 GRV CHRD
130 ADLBSOLO
131 JAZZEND1
132 JAZZEND2
133 FUNK BRK
134 FUNKEND1
135 FUNKEND2
136 SANTUR
137 STRINGS
138 RESOBASS
139 SYNCHRD1
140 SYNCHRD2
141 GTRCHRD1
142 GTRCHRD2
143 PAD&BASS
144 ACO GTR
145 WAH GTR
146 CUT GTR
147 VOICES
LATIN
86 LATIN1
87 LATIN2
88 LATIN3
89 MAMBO
90 MERENGUE
91 SALSA1
92 SALSA2
93 SALSA3
94 SONGO
95 TJANO
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
41
41
33
36
36
30
25
47
24
24
120 1SHOT
108 1SHOT
130 1SHOT
182 1SHOT
207 1SHOT
115 1SHOT
102 1SHOT
165 1SHOT
109 1SHOT
89 1SHOT
BRAZIL
96 BOSSA
97 SAMBA1
98 SAMBA2
4/4
4/4
4/4
27
20
28
85 1SHOT
152 1SHOT
136 1SHOT
BASICPTN
86 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
120 TAP
99 8BEAT1
100 8BEAT2
101 8BEAT3
102 SHUFFL1
103 SHUFFL2
104 16BEAT1
105 16BEAT2
106 SLOW
107 FUNK
108 BLUES
109 DIXIE
110 BOSSA BT
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
8
16
8
8
8
4
4
8
8
118 LOOP
140 LOOP
113 LOOP
120 LOOP
108 LOOP
120 LOOP
112 LOOP
64 LOOP
106 LOOP
120 LOOP
162 LOOP
120 LOOP
148 ANLGPERC
149 SFX TAP
150 CAR CELL
12
8
4
1 2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa ra m e te r List
Dru m Kit Pa ra m e te rs
KIT
Parameter
Value
Drum Kit
1–99
KIT/ IN ST
Parameter
Value
Instrument
1–1024
Instrument Group
KICK, SNARE, TOM, HI-HAT, CRASH, RIDE, PERC,
SPECIAL, MELODIC, VOICES, REVERSE,
FIXED HI-HAT, OFF
Level
Pan
0–127
L15–CENTER–R15, RANDOM, ALTERNATE
Pitch
Decay
-480–+480
-31–+31
KIT/ AMBIEN CE
Parameter
Value
Ambience Switch
Ambience Send Level
Studio Type
OFF, ON
0–127
LIVING, BATHROOM, STUDIO, GARAGE, LOCKER,
THEATER, CAVE, GYM, STADIUM
WOOD, PLASTER, GLASS
SMALL, MEDIUM, LARGE
0–127
Wall Type
Room Size
Ambience Level
KIT/ EQ UALIZER
Parameter
Value
Master Equalizer Switch
High Gain
Low Gain
OFF, ON
-12dB–+12dB
-12dB–+12dB
KIT/ CO N TRO L
Parameter
Value
Pad Pattern
OFF, 1–250
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
0 (C -)–127 (G 9)
0.1sec–8.0sec (0.1 sec steps)
+
+
Pad Pattern Velocity
Pitch Control Assign
Note Number
+
+
Gate Time
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
KIT/ CO MMO N
Parameter
Value
Master Volume
0–127
0–15
-24–+24
8 characters (*1)
Pedal Hi-Hat Volume
Pitch Control Range
Drum Kit Name
*1:
space
1 3 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa ra m e te r List
KIT/ CO PY
Parameter
Value
P01–P99, U01–U99
U01–U99
Copy Source
Copy Destination
KIT/ EXCHAN GE
Parameter
Value
P01–P99, U01–U99
U01–U99
Exchange Source
Exchange Destination
So n g Pa ra m e te rs
SO N G
Parameter
Value
Song
1–250
+
Song Category
DRUMS, ROCK, METAL, BALLAD, R&B, BLUES, POPS,
R&R, COUNTRY, JAZZ, FUSION, DANCE, REGGAE,
LATIN, BRAZIL, BASICPTN, LOOP, 1SHOT, TAP, USER
+
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
SO N G/ CO MMO N
Parameter
Value
Tempo
Play Type
Quick Play
Reset Time
Tap Exclusive Switch
Song Lock
Song Name
20–260
LOOP, 1SHOT, TAP
OFF, ON
OFF, 0.1s–8.0s (0.1 sec steps)
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
+
+
+
+
+
#
#
8 characters (*1)
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
#: This setting cannot be made when the preset song is selected.
*1:
space
SO N G/ PART:Pe rc
Parameter
Value
1–10
0–127
0–127
Percussion Set
Level
Ambience Send Level
+
+
+
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
SO N G/ PART:Pa rt1 –Pa rt4
Parameter
Value
Instrument
Level
Pan
Ambience Send Level
Bend Range
1–128
0–127
L15–CENTER–R15
0–127
0–24
+
+
+
+
+
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
1 3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa ra m e te r List
SO N G/ CO PY
Parameter
Value
1–250
151–250
Copy Source
Copy Destination
+
+
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
SO N G/ DELETE
Parameter
Value
Delete Song
151–250
+
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
SO N G/ ERASE
Parameter
Value
Erase Song
Erase Part
151–250
+
+
ALL, KIT, PERC, PART1, PART2, PART3, PART4
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
Se tu p Pa ra m e te rs
SETUP/ UTILITY
Parameter
Value
LCD Contrast
1–16
0–127
0–127
Percussion Part Level
Backing Level
Mute
+
+
+
SongDrum, SongDrm/ Prc, UserDrmPart, Part1, Part2,
Part3, Part4, Part1-4
Master Tune
Preview Velocity
Available Memory
415.3–466.2 (0.1 Hz steps)
0–127
0–100% (check only)
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
SETUP/ TRIG BASIC
Parameter
Value
Trigger Type
PD6, PD7/ 9, PD80/ 100, PD80R, PD120, KD7, KD Type,
CY6, CY Type, Other 1, Other 2, AcDrTrig
Sensitivity
Threshold
Trigger Curve
1–16
0–15
LINEAR, EXP1, EXP2, LOG1, LOG2, SPLINE, LOUD1,
LOUD2
Crosstalk Cancel
OFF, 20–80 (5 steps)
SETUP/ TRIG ADVN CD
Parameter
Value
Scan Time
Retrigger Cancel
Mask Time
0–4.0ms (0.1 ms steps)
1–16
0–64ms (4ms steps)
OFF, 1–15
Rim Sensitivity
1 3 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa ra m e te r List
SETUP/ MIDI CO MMO N
Parameter
Value
Note Chase
Local Control
Sync Mode
Channel 10 Priority
Pedal Data Thin
GM Mode
Rx GM On
Soft Thru
Device ID
Tx PC Switch
Rx PC Switch
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
INT, EXT, REMOTE
KIT, PERC
OFF, 1, 2
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
1–32
+
+
+
+
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
+
+
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
SETUP/ MIDI PART
Parameter
Value
Drum Kit Part MIDI Channel
1–16, OFF
1–16, OFF
1–16, OFF
1–16, OFF
1–16, OFF
1–16, OFF
+
+
+
+
+
+
Percussion Part MIDI Channel
Part 1 MIDI Channel
Part 2 MIDI Channel
Part 3 MIDI Channel
Part 4 MIDI Channel
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
SETUP/ GM PART
Parameter
Value
Part 1 Rx Switch
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Part 2 Rx Switch
Part 3 Rx Switch
Part 4 Rx Switch
Part 5 Rx Switch
Part 6 Rx Switch
Part 7 Rx Switch
Part 8 Rx Switch
Part 9 Rx Switch
Part 10 Rx Switch
Part 11 Rx Switch
Part 12 Rx Switch
Part 13 Rx Switch
Part 14 Rx Switch
Part 15 Rx Switch
Part 16 Rx Switch
-: This setting can be made in GM mode only.
SETUP/ BULK DUMP
Parameter
Value
Bulk Dump
ALL, SETUP, ALL SONGS, ALL KITS, KIT 01–KIT 99
SETUP/ Fa cto ry Re se t
Parameter
Value
Factory Reset
ALL, THIS DRUM KIT, ALL DRUM KITS, ALL SONGS
1 3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa ra m e te r List
Click Pa ra m e te rs
CLICK
Parameter
Value
Click Level
Time Signature
Interval
0–127
+
+
+
+
0–13/ 2, 0–13/ 4, 0–13/ 8, 0–13/ 16
1/ 2, 3/ 8, 1/ 4, 4/ 8, 1/ 12, 1/ 16
VOICE, CLICK, BEEP, METRONOME, CLAVES,
WOOD BLOCK, STICKS, CROSS STICK, TRIANGLE,
COWBELL, CONGA, TALKING DRM, MARACAS,
CABASA, CUICA, AGOGO, TAMBOURINE, SNAPS, 909
SNARE, 808 COWBELL
Inst
Pan
L15–CENTER–R15
OFF, 1MEAS, 2MEAS
OFF, 1MEAS, 2MEAS
+
+
+
Play Count In
Recording Count In
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
So n g Re co rd in g
Re co rd in g Sta n d b y
Parameter
Value
Time Signature
Length
Tempo
Quantize
1–13/ 2, 1–13/ 4, 1–13/ 8, 1–13/ 16
1–999
20–260
+
+
+
+
(8th note),
(8th note triplets),
(16th note triplets),
(32nd note triplets),
(16th note),
(32nd note),
(64th note), OFF
Recording Mode
Hit Pad Start
REPLACE, LOOP ALL, LOOP 1, LOOP 2
OFF, ON
+
+
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
Te m p o
Te m p o
Parameter
Value
Tempo
20–260
+
+: This setting cannot be made in GM mode.
1 3 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
Model TD-6
Version 1.00 Feb. 13, 2001
■ Foot Control (Controller number 4)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
04H
3rd byte
vvH
■ Normal mode
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Control value:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Section 1. Receive data
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the drum kit part can be received.
When recording, this will be recorded as PEDAL CC data in the sequencer data
itself.
■ Channel Voice Messages
*
Following Channel Voice Messages can be recorded in SETUP/ MIDI PART/
Part CH.
■ Data Entry (Controller number 6)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
06H
3rd byte
mmH
■ Note Off
Status
2nd byte
kkH
3rd byte
vvH
8nH
n = MIDI channel number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
9nH
kkH
00H
mm = The value of the parameter specified by RPN.
n = MIDI channel number:
kk = note number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part can be received.
Not recorded in the sequencer.
vv = note off velocity:
On the normal mode of TD-6, RPN can be used to modify the following
parameters.
*
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part can be received.
The Velocity Values of Note Off message are ignored.
When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.
RPN
Data entry
MSB LSB
mmH ---
MSB LSB
00H 00H
Explanation
Pitch Bend Sensitivity
■ Note On
mm: 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones)
LSB: ignored (processed as 00H)
specify up to 2 octaves in semitone steps
RPN null
Status
2nd byte
kkH
3rd byte
vvH
9nH
7FH 7FH
--- ---
n = MIDI channel number:
kk = note number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
set condition where RPN is unspecified. The
data entry messages after set RPN null will
be ignored.(No Data entry messages are
required after RPN null).
vv = note on velocity:
*
*
*
A channel which is assigned to the drum kit part will receive only the note
numbers which are specified by the drum kit.
Settings already made will not change.
MSB,LSB of data entry:ignored
A channel which is assigned to the percussion part will receive only the note
numbers which are specified by the percussion set.
When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.
■ Volume (Controller number 7)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
07H
3rd byte
vvH
■ Polyphonic Key Pressure
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Volume:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
AnH
kkH
vvH
n = MIDI channel number:
kk = note number:
vv = Value:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
*
*
Volume messages are used to adjust the volume balance of each part.
Only the channel assigned to the percussion part and the backing part can be
received.
*
*
*
A channel which is assigned to the drum kit part will receive only the note
numbers which are specified by the drum kit.
*
Not recorded in the sequencer.
If the value is greater than 40H (64), the decay of the note sounded by the
received note number will be shortened.
■ Pan (Controller number 10)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
0AH
3rd byte
vvH
Not recorded in the sequencer.
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Pan:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
■ Control Change
00H - 40H - 7FH (Left - Center - Right)
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part can be received.
Not recorded in the sequencer.
■ Bank Select (Controller number 0, 32)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
00H
3rd byte
mmH
llH
■ Hold 1 (Controller number 64)
BnH
20H
Status
BnH
2nd byte
40H
3rd byte
vvH
n = MIDI channel number:
mm = Bank number MSB:
ll = Bank number LSB:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (bank.1 - bank.128)
processed as 00H
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Control value:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0-63 = OFF, 64-127 = ON
*
*
Not Received when SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Rx PC Sw is set to "OFF".(Initial
Value is ON)
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part can be received.
When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.
Bank select processing will be suspended until a program change message is
received.
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part can be received.
Not recorded in the sequencer.
1 3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
■ Effect 1(Reverb Send Level) (Controller number 91)
■ Channel Mode Messages
Status
BnH
2nd byte
5BH
3rd byte
vvH
■ All Sounds Off (Controller number 120)
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Reverb send level:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
BnH
78H
00H
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part can be received.
When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.
n = MIDI channel number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
*
When this message is received, all currently-sounding notes on the
corresponding channel will be silenced. However, the status of channel
messages will not change.
■ RPN MSB/LSB (Controller number 101, 100)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
65H
3rd byte
mmH
llH
*
When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.
BnH
64H
■ Reset All Controllers (Controller number 121)
n = MIDI channel number:0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
mm = upper byte of parameter number specified by RPN (MSB)
ll = lower byte of parameter number specified by RPN (LSB)
BnH
79H
00H
n = MIDI channel number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part can be received.
The value specified by RPN will not be reset even by messages such as program
change or reset all controllers.
*
*
When this message is received, the following controllers will be set to their reset
values.
*
When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.
When recording, a control message carrying the reset value will be created and
recorded.
**RPN**
The RPN (Registered Parameter Number) messages are expanded control
changes,and each function of an RPN is described by the MIDI Standard.
To use these messages, you must first use RPN (controller number 100 and 110,
their order does not matter) to specify the parameter to be controlled, and then use
Data Entry messages (controller number 6, 38) to specify the value of the specified
parameter. Once an RPN parameter has been specified, all data entry messages
received on that channel will modify the value of that parameter. To prevent
accidents, it is recommended that you set RPN null (RPN number = 7FH 7FH)
when you have finished setting the value of the desired parameter. Refer to
On the normal mode of TD-6, RPN can be used to modify the following
parameters. Regarding the value of each parameter, refer to Data Entry (Controller
number 6).
Controller
Reset value
Pitch Bend Change
Polyphonic Key Pressure
Foot Control
Hold 1
+/ -0 (center)
0 (off)
0 (off)
0 (off)
RPN
unset; previously set data will not change
■ All Notes Off (Controller number 123)
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
BnH
7BH
00H
n = MIDI channel number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
*
When All Notes Off is received, all notes on the corresponding channel will be
turned off. However if Hold 1 is ON, the sound will be continued until these are
turned off.
RPN
mm
00H
7FH
ll
Parameter
*
In the recording mode, Note OFF message will be created for corresponding
Note ON message, and will be recorded.
00H
7FH
Pitch Bend Sensitivity
RPN null
■ OMNI OFF (Controller number 124)
■ Program Change
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
Status
2nd byte
BnH
7CH
00H
CnH
ppH
n = MIDI channel number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
n = MIDI channel number:
pp = Program number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (prog.1 - prog.128)
*
The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received.
*
*
Not Received when SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Rx PC Sw is set to "OFF".(Initial
Value is ON)
■ OMNI ON (Controller number 125)
The sound will change beginning with the next note-on after the program
change is received. Voices which were already sounding before the program
change was received will not be affected.
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
BnH
7DH
00H
n = MIDI channel number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
*
Not recorded in the sequencer.
*
The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received.
■ Pitch Bend Change
■ MONO (Controller number 126)
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
mmH
EnH
llH
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
BnH
7EH
mmH
n = MIDI channel number:
mm,ll = Pitch Bend value:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00 00H - 40 00H - 7F 7FH (-8192 - 0 - +8191)
n = MIDI channel number:
mm = mono number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 10H (0 - 16)
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part can be received.
When recording, this is recorded in the sequencer data itself.
*
The same processing will be carried out as when All Sound Off or All Notes Off
is received.
1 3 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
■ POLY (Controller number 127)
■ System Exclusive Message
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
■ Turn General MIDI System On
BnH
7FH
00H
This is a command message that resets the internal settings of the unit to the
General MIDI initial state (General MIDI System - Level 1). After receiving this
message, this unit will automatically be set to the proper condition for correctly
playing a General MIDI score.
n = MIDI channel number:0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
*
The same processing will be carried out as when All Sound Off or All Notes Off
is received.
Status
F0H
Data byte
Status
F7H
■ System Realtime Message
7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H
*
Following System Realtime Messages cannot be recorded in recording mode.
Byte
F0H
7EH
7FH
09H
01H
F7H
Explanation
Exclusive status
■ Timing Clock
Status
ID number (Universal Non-realtime Message)
Device ID (Broadcast)
F8H
Sub ID#1 (General MIDI Message)
Sub ID#2 (General MIDI 1 On)
EOX (End Of Exclusive)
*
Recognized only when the SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Sync Mode is set to
"EXT".
*
*
Not Received when SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Rx GM ON is set to
"OFF".(Initial Value is ON)
■ Start
Status
There must be an interval of at least 50 ms between this message and the next.
FAH
■ Universal Non-realtime
*
Recognized only when the SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Sync Mode is set to "EXT"
or "REMOTE".
System Exclusive Messages
■ Identity Request
■ Continue
Status
F0H
Data byte
Status
F7H
Status
7EH, dev, 06H, 01H
FBH
Byte
Explanation
*
Recognized only when the SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Sync Mode is set to "EXT"
or "REMOTE".
F0H
Exclusive status
7EH
ID number (universal non-realtime message)
Device ID (dev:00H - 1FH (1 - 32) Initial value is 10H (17))
Identity request
dev
■ Stop
Status
06H, 01H
F7H
EOX (End Of Exclusive)
FCH
*
*
Even if the Device ID is 7FH (Broadcast), Identity reply message will be
*
Recognized only when the SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Sync Mode is set to "EXT"
or "REMOTE".
transmitted.
When Identity Request is received, Identity reply message will be transmitted
■ Active Sensing
Status
■ Data transmission
TD-6 can transmit and receive the various parameters using System Exclusive
FEH
messages.
*
When Active Sensing is received, the unit will begin monitoring the intervals of
all further messages. While monitoring, if the interval between messages
exceeds about 420 ms, the same processing will be carried out as when All
Sounds Off, All Notes Off and Reset All Controllers are received, and message
interval monitoring will be halted.
The exclusive message of TD-6s data has a model ID of 00H 3FH and a device ID of
10H (17). Device ID can be changed in TD-6.'
■ Request data 1 RQ1 (11H)
This message requests the other device to send data. The Address and Size
determine the type and amount of data to be sent.
■ System Exclusive Message
When a Data Request message is received, if the device is ready to transmit data
and if the address and size are appropriate, the requested data will be transmitted
as a "Data Set 1 (DT1)" message. If not, nothing will be transmitted.
*
Following System Exclusive Messages cannot be recorded.
Status
F0H
Data byte
Status
F7H
iiH, ddH, ......, eeH
Status
F0H
Data byte
Status
F7H
41H, dev, 00H, 3FH, 11H, aaH,
bbH, ccH, ddH, ssH, ttH, uuH,
vvH, sum
F0H:
System Exclusive Message status
ii = ID number:
an ID number (manufacturer ID) to indicate the manufacturer
whose Exclusive message this is. Roland’s manufacturer ID is
41H.
Byte
F0H
Explanation
ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standard;
Universal Non-realtime Messages (7EH) and Universal
Realtime Messages (7FH).
Exclusive status
ID number (Roland)
41H
dev
Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH (1 - 32) Initial value is 10H (17))
Model ID (TD-6)
dd,..., ee = data:
F7H:
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
00H 3FH
11H
EOX (End Of Exclusive)
Command ID (RQ1)
aaH
Address MSB:
The System Exclusive Messages received by the normal mode of TD-6 are;
Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive Messages, Data Requests (RQ1), and
Data Set (DT1).
upper byte of the starting address of the requested data
Address 2nd:
bbH
2nd byte of the starting address of the requested data
1 3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
ccH
Address 3rd:
■ Note on
3rd byte of the starting address of the requested data
Status
2nd byte
kkH
3rd byte
vvH
ddH
Address LSB:
9nH
lower byte of the starting address of the requested data
n = MIDI channel number:
kk = note number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
01H - 7FH (1 - 127)
ssH
ttH
Size MSB
Size 2nd
vv = note on velocity:
uuH
vvH
sum
F7H
Size 3rd
Size LSB
*
*
On the channel assigned to the drum kit part, the note numbers specified by the
drum kit will be transmitted.
Checksum
EOX (End Of Exclusive)
On the channel assigned to the percussion part, the note numbers specified by
the percussion set will be transmitted.
*
The amount of data that can be transmitted at once time will depend on the type
of data, and data must be requested using a specific starting address and size.
■ Polyphonic Key Pressure
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
*
AnH
kkH
vvH
■ Data set 1 DT1 (12H)
n = MIDI channel number:
kk = note number:
vv = value:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
00H, 7FH (0, 127)
This is the message that actually performs data transmission, and is used when you
wish to transmit the data.
Status
F0H
Data byte
Status
*
On the channel assigned to the drum part, 7FH will be transmitted when the rim
of the pad is pressed and 00H when the rim is released, for the note number
specified for the head and rim.
41H, dev, 00H, 3FH, 12H, aaH, bbH, F7H
ccH, ddH, eeH,... ffH, sum
Byte
F0H
Explanation
■ Control Change
Exclusive status
41H
ID number (Roland)
■ Bank Select (Controller number 0, 32)
dev
Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH (1 - 32) Initial value is 10H (17))
Status
BnH
2nd byte
00H
3rd byte
mmH
llH
00H 3FH
12H
Model ID (TD-6)
Command ID (DT1)
BnH
20H
aaH
Address MSB:
upper byte of the starting address of the transmitted data
n = MIDI channel number:
mm = Bank number MSB:
ll = Bank number LSB:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (bank.1 - bank.128)
processed as 00H
bbH
ccH
ddH
eeH
Address 2nd :
2nd byte of the starting address of the transmitted data
Address 3rd:
*
Not transmitted when SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Tx PC Sw is set to "OFF".
(Initial Value is ON)
3rd byte of the starting address of the transmitted data
Address LSB:
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part are sent.
Bank selects corresponding to each parts instrument are sent when a song is
selected. Also, when instruments are selected for parts, bank selects for the
respective instruments are sent.
lower byte of the starting address of the transmitted data
Data: the actual data to be transmitted. Multiple bytes of data
are transmitted starting from the address.
:
:
ffH
sum
F7H
Data
■ Foot control (Controller number 4)
Checksum
Status
BnH
2nd byte
04H
3rd byte
vvH
EOX (End Of Exclusive)
*
The amount of data that can be transmitted at once time will depend on the type
of data, and data must be requested using a specific starting address and size.
If "Data Set 1" is transmitted successively, there must be an interval of at least 40
ms.
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Control value:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
*
This is transmitted only on the channel which is assigned to the drum kit part.
*
*
■ Data Entry (Controller number 6)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
06H
3rd byte
mmH
Section 2. Transmit data
n = MIDI channel number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
*
When SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Soft Thru is set to "ON", messages received in
addition to the following messages are also sent.
mm = The value of the parameter specified by RPN.
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part are sent.
■ Channel Voice Messages
When a song is selected or adjust SONG/ PART/ Bend Range setting, the pitch
bend sensitivity of the sequencer song data will be transmitted.
*
The following channel voice messages are transmitted on the channel specified
as the SETUP/ MIDI PART/ Part CH.
Values for the RPN parameter, on the normal mode of TD-6, are as follows.
■ Note off
RPN
Data entry
MSB LSB
mmH ---
Status
2nd byte
kkH
3rd byte
vvH
MSB LSB
00H 00H
Explanation
8nH
Pitch Bend Sensitivity
mm: 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones)
RPN null
n = MIDI channel number:
kk = note number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
40H (64) fixed
7FH 7FH
--- ---
set condition where RPN is unspecified.
vv = Note off velocity:
1 3 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
is selected. Also, when instruments are selected for parts, program changes for
the respective instruments are sent.'
■ Volume (Controller number 7)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
07H
3rd byte
vvH
■ Pitch Bend Change
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Volume:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
mmH
EnH
llH
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the percussion part and the backing part are sent.
When a song is selected, the part level of the sequencer song data will be
transmitted.
n = MIDI channel number:0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
mm,ll = Pitch Bend value:00 00H - 40 00H - 7F 7FH (-8192 - 0 - +8191)
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part are sent.
Transmitted only when the TD-6 is in play for song in which pitch bend change
is recorded.
■ Pan (Controller number 10)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
0AH
3rd byte
vvH
■ System Realtime Message
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Pan:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 40H - 7FH (Left - Center - Right)
■ Timing Clock
Status
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part are sent.
When a song is selected, the pan of the sequencer song data will be transmitted.
F8H
■ Hold 1 (Controller number 64)
■ Start
Status
BnH
2nd byte
40H
3rd byte
vvH
Status
FAH
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Control value:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
■ Continue
Status
00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0-63 = OFF 64-127 = ON
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part are sent.
Transmitted only when the TD-6 is in play for song in which Hold 1 is recorded.
FBH
■ Stop
Status
■ Effect 1 (Reverb Send Level) (Controller number 91)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
5BH
3rd byte
vvH
FCH
■ Active sensing
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Reverb send level:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FHÅi0 - 127Åj
Status
FEH
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the percussion part and backing part are sent.
When a song is selected, the reverb send level of the sequencer song data will be
transmitted.
*
This will be transmitted constantly at intervals of approximately 250 ms.
■ System Exclusive Messages
■ RPN MSB/LSB (Controller number 101,100)
*
Status
BnH
2nd byte
65H
3rd byte
mmH
llH
Identity reply and Data Set 1 (DT1) are the only System Exclusive messages
transmitted by TD-6.
BnH
64H
When an appropriate Identity Request or Data Request 1 (RQ1) message is
received, the requested internal data will be transmitted.
n = MIDI channel number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
mm = upper byte of parameter number specified by RPN (MSB)
ll = lower byte of parameter number specified by RPN (LSB)
■ Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive
*
*
Only the channel assigned to the backing part are sent.
When a song is selected, the pitch bend sensitivity of the sequencer song data
will be transmitted.
Messages
■ Identity Reply
*
Status
F0H
Data byte
Status
F7H
Values for the RPN parameter, on the normal mode of TD-6, are as follows.
Regarding the value of each parameter, refer to Data Entry (Controller number 6).
7EH, dev, 06H, 02H, 41H, 3FH,
01H, 00H, 00H, 00H, 02H, 00H, 00H
RPN
Byte
Explanation
mm
00H
7FH
ll
Parameter
F0H
Exclusive status
00H
7FH
Pitch Bend Sensitivity
RPN null
7EH
ID number (universal non-realtime message)
Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH (1 - 32) Initial value is 10H (17))
Identity Reply
dev
06H 02H
41H
■ Program Change
Status
ID number(Roland)
3FH 01H
00H 00H
Device family code
2nd byte
Device family number code
CnH
ppH
00H 02H 00H 00H software revision level
F7H EOX (End Of Exclusive)
n = MIDI channel number:
pp = Program number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (prog.1 - prog.128)
*
transmitted.
*
*
*
Not transmitted when SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Tx PC Sw is set to
"OFF".(Initial Value is ON)
Program changes corresponding to drum kit are sent when drum kits are
selected.
Program changes corresponding to each parts instrument are sent when a song
1 3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
■ Data Transmission
■ Control Change
■ Data set 1 DT1 (12H)
■ Modulation (Controller number 1)
Status
F0H
Data byte
Status
F7H
Status
BnH
2nd byte
01H
3rd byte
vvH
41H, dev, 00H, 3FH, 12H, aaH,
bbH, ccH, ddH, eeH,... ffH, sum
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Modulation depth:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Byte
F0H
Explanation
Exclusive status
ID number (Roland)
*
In the rhythm part (ch.10), ignored this message.
41H
dev
Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH (1 - 32) Initial value is 10H (17))
Model ID (TD-6)
■ Data Entry (Controller number 6, 38)
00H 3FH
12H
Status
BnH
2nd byte
06H
3rd byte
mmH
llH
Command ID (DT1)
aaH
Address MSB: upper byte of the starting address of the data to
BnH
26H
be sent
bbH
n = MIDI channel number:0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
mm, ll = The value of the parameter specified by RPN.
mm = upper byte (MSB), ll = lower byte (LSB)
Address 2nd: 2nd byte of the starting address of the data to be
Address 3rd: 3rd byte of the starting address of the data to be
Address LSB: lower byte of the starting address of the data to be
sent
ccH
sent.
ddH
sent.
eeH
*
In the rhythm part (ch.10), ignored this message.
On the GM mode of TD-6, RPN can be used to modify the following parameters.
Data: the actual data to be sent. Multiple bytes of data are
RPN
Data entry
MSB LSB
mmH ---
transmitted in order starting from the address.
MSB LSB
00H 00H
Explanation
:
:
Pitch Bend Sensitivity
ffH
sum
F7H
Data
mm: 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones)
ll: ignored (processed as 00H)
specify up to 2 octaves in semitone steps
Channel Fine Tuning
Checksum
EOX (End Of Exclusive)
00H 01H
mmH llH
*
*
*
The amount of data that can be transmitted at once time will depend on the type
of data, and data must be requested using a specific starting address and size.
Data larger than 128 bytes must be divided into packets of 128 bytes or less. If
“Data Set 1” is transmitted successively, there must be an interval of at least 40
ms between packets.
mm,ll: 00 00H - 40 00H - 7F 7FH
(-100 - 0 - +99.99 cents)
Channel Coarse Tuning
00H 02H
7FH 7FH
mmH ---
--- ---
mm: 28H-40H-58H (-24 - 0 - +24 semitones)
ll: ignored (processed as 00H)
RPN null
set condition where RPN is unspecified. The
data entry messages after set RPN null will
be ignored. (No Data entry messages are
required after RPN null).
■ GM mode
Settings already made will not change.
mm,ll: ignored
Section 1. Receive data
■ Channel Voice Messages
■ Volume (Controller number 7)
*
The following Channel Voice messages can be received on channels for which
Status
BnH
2nd byte
07H
3rd byte
vvH
the SETUP/ GM PART/ Part Rx Sw is set to "ON".
■ Note Off
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Volume:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Status
2nd byte
kkH
3rd byte
vvH
8nH
*
Volume messages are used to adjust the volume balance of each part.
9nH
kkH
00H
n = MIDI channel number:
kk = note number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
■ Pan (Controller number 10)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
0AH
3rd byte
vvH
vv = note off velocity:
*
*
In the rhythm part (ch.10), ignored this message.
The Velocity Values of Note Off message are ignored.
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = pan:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 40H - 7FH (Left - Center - Right)
*
In the rhythm part (ch.10), ignored this message.
■ Note On
Status
2nd byte
kkH
3rd byte
vvH
■ Expression (Controller number 11)
9nH
Status
BnH
2nd byte
0BH
3rd byte
vvH
n = MIDI channel number:
kk = note number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Expression:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
vv = note on velocity:
*
Expression messages are used to adjust the level of each part. It can be used
independently from volume messages. Expression messages are used for
musical expression within a performance; e.g., crescendo and decrescendo.
1 4 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
■ Hold 1 (Controller number 64)
■ Channel Mode Messages
Status
BnH
2nd byte
40H
3rd byte
vvH
■ All Sounds Off (Controller number 120)
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Control value:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
BnH
78H
00H
00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0-63 = OFF, 64-127 = ON
n = MIDI channel number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
*
In the rhythm part (ch.10), ignored this message.
*
When this message is received, all currently-sounding notes on the
corresponding channel will be silenced. However, the status of channel
messages will not change.
■ Effect 1(Reverb Send Level) (Controller number 91)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
5BH
3rd byte
vvH
■ Reset All Controllers (Controller number 121)
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Reverb send level:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
BnH
79H
00H
■ RPN MSB/LSB (Controller number 100, 101)
n = MIDI channel number:0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
Status
BnH
2nd byte
65H
3rd byte
mmH
llH
*
When this message is received, the following controllers will be set to their reset
values.
BnH
64H
n = MIDI channel number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
Controller
Reset value
mm = upper byte of parameter number specified by RPN (MSB)
ll = lower byte of parameter number specified by RPN (LSB)
Pitch Bend Change
Channel Key Pressure
Modulation
Expression
+/ -0 (center)
0 (off)
0 (off)
*
*
In the rhythm part (ch.10), ignored this message.
The value specified by RPN will not be reset even by messages such as program
change or reset all controllers.
127 (max)
Hold 1
0 (off)
RPN
unset; previously set data will not change
*
■ All Notes Off (Controller number 123)
On the GM mode of TD-6, RPN can be used to modify the following parameters.
Regarding the value of each parameter, refer to Data Entry (Controller number 6,
38).
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
BnH
7BH
00H
RPN
n = MIDI channel number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
mm
00H
00H
00H
7FH
ll
Parameter
*
When All Notes Off is received, all notes on the corresponding channel will be
turned off. However if Hold 1 is ON, the sound will be continued until these are
turned off.
00H
01H
02H
7FH
Pitch Bend Sensitivity
Channel Fine Tuning
Channel Coarse Tuning
RPN null
■ System Realtime Message
■ Program Change
■ Active Sensing
Status
2nd byte
Status
CnH
ppH
FEH
n = MIDI channel number:
pp = Program number:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
*
When Active Sensing is received, the unit will begin monitoring the intervals of
all further messages. While monitoring, if the interval between messages
exceeds about 420 ms, the same processing will be carried out as when All
Sounds Off, All Notes Off and Reset All Controllers are received, and message
interval monitoring will be halted.
00H - 7FH (prog.1 - prog.128)
*
The sound will change beginning with the next note-on after the program
change is received. Voices which were already sounding before the program
change was received will not be affected.
■ Channel Pressure
■ System Exclusive Message
Status
2nd byte
*
DnH
vvH
The System Exclusive Messages received by the normal mode of TD-6 are;
Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive Messages, Universal realtime System
Exclusive Messages, Data Requests (RQ1), and Data Set (DT1).
n = MIDI channel number:
vv = Channel pressure:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
*
*
When channel pressure is received, the effect selected for channel pressure, in
In the rhythm part (ch.10), ignored this message.
■ Pitch Bend Change
Status
2nd byte
3rd byte
mmH
EnH
llH
n = MIDI channel number:
mm,ll = Pitch Bend value:
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00 00H - 40 00H - 7F 7FH (-8192 - 0 - +8191)
*
In the rhythm part (ch.10), ignored this message.
1 4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
rr=00H-7FH
pp=4
0 - 600 cents
■ System exclusive messages related to mode
LFO Filter Depth
0 - 2400 cents
setting
rr=00H-7FH
pp=5
LFO Amplitude Depth
0 - 100 %
■ Turn General MIDI System On
rr=00H-7FH
This is a command message that resets the internal settings of the unit to the
General MIDI initial state (General MIDI System - Level 1). After receiving this
message, this unit will automatically be set to the proper condition for correctly
playing a General MIDI score.
*
*
Even if the Device ID is 7FH (Broadcast), Identity Reply message will be
transmitted.
In the rhythm part (ch.10), ignored this message.
Status
F0H
Data byte
Status
F7H
■ Data transmission
7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H
Byte
F0H
7EH
7FH
09H
01H
F7H
Explanation
■ Request data 1 RQ1 (11H)
Exclusive status
*
ID number (Universal Non-realtime Message)
Device ID (Broadcast)
■ Data set 1 DT1 (12H)
Sub ID#1 (General MIDI Message)
Sub ID#2 (General MIDI On)
EOX (End Of Exclusive)
*
Section 2. Transmit data
*
*
Not Received when SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Rx GM ON is set to
"OFF".(Initial Value is ON)
*
When SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Soft Thru is set to "ON", messages received in
addition to the following messages are also sent.
There must be an interval of at least 50 ms between this message and the next.
■ System Realtime Messages
■ Turn General MIDI System Off
When a "GM System Off" is received, the TD-6 is switched to normal mode.
■ Active sensing
Status
Status
F0H
Data byte
Status
F7H
FEH
7EH, 7FH, 09H, 02H
*
This will be transmitted constantly at intervals of approximately 250 ms.
Byte
F0H
7EH
7FH
09H
02H
F7H
Explanation
Exclusive status
■ System Exclusive Messages
ID number (Universal Non-realtime Message)
Device ID (Broadcast)
■ Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive
Sub ID#1 (General MIDI Message)
Sub ID#2 (General MIDI Off)
EOX (End Of Exclusive)
Messages
■ Identity Reply
*
*
Not Received when SETUP/ MIDI COMMON/ Rx GM ON is set to
"OFF".(Initial Value is ON)
*
There must be an interval of at least 50 ms between this message and the next.
■ Data Transmission
■ Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive
■ Data set 1 DT1 (12H)
Messages
*
■ Identity Request
*
■ Global Parameter Control
■ Channel Pressure
Status
F0H
Data byte
Status
7FH, dev, 09H, 01H, 0nH, ppH, rrH F7H
Byte
Explanation
F0H
Exclusive status
7FH
ID number (Universal Realtime Message)
Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH Initial value is 10H (17))
Sub ID#1 (Controller Destination Setting)
Sub ID#2 (Channel Pressure)
MIDI channel (00H - 0FH)
parameter
dev
09H
01H
0nH
ppH
rrH
range
F7H
EOX (End Of Exclusive)
Pitch Control
pp=0
rr=28H-58H
pp=1
rr=00H-7FH
pp=2
rr=00H-7FH
pp=3
-24 - +24 semitones
Filter Cutoff Control
-9600 - +9450 cents
Amplitude Control
0 - 200 %
LFO Pitch Depth
1 4 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
|
|
|
|
|
|
03 | 0000 aaaa | Sensitivity
0 — 15
|
|
|
|
■ Parameter address map
|
|
(1 — 16)
0 — 15
04 | 0000 aaaa | Threshold
05 | 0000 0aaa | Trigger Curve
0 — 7
(Model ID = 00H 3FH)
|
|
|
|
(LINEAR,EXP1,EXP2,LOG1,LOG2,SPLINE, |
LOUD1,LOUD2)
|
This map indicates address, size, Data (range), Parameter, and Description of
parameters which can be transferred using "Data set 1 (DT1)".
All the numbers of address, size, Data, and Default Value are indicated in 7-bit
Hexadecimal-form.
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
06 | 00aa aaaa | Scan Time
0 — 40
|
|
|
(0.0ms — 4.0ms, 0.1ms step) |
07 | 0000 aaaa | Retrigger Cancel
0 — 15
(1 — 16)
0 — 16
|
|
|
|
|
08 | 000a aaaa | Mask Time
Addresses marked at "#" cannot be used as starting addresses.
|
|
(0ms — 64ms, 4ms step) |
09 | 0000 aaaa | Crosstalk Cancel
0 — 13
(OFF,20,25,30,35,40,45,50,55,60,65, |
70,75,80)
|
|
|
|
|
■ Parameter Address Block
TD-6 (Model ID = 00H 3FH)
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
0A | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored)
|
|
|
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
:
|
:
|
| Start
address
|
|
|
10 | 0000 0000 |
|
| Description
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
Total size | 00 00 00 11
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
| 00 00 00 00 | SETUP
(Individual)
*1—1|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
*
1-1-2 MIDI
| 01 00 00 00 | DRUM KIT 1
(Individual)
(Individual)
*1—2|
|
*1—2|
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
|
:
|
:
| Offset
address
|
|
|
|
| 01 62 00 00 | DRUM KIT 99
|
| Size
| Description
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
| 04 00 00 00 | dummy (ignored)
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
| 10 00 00 00 | USER SONG (Bulk) *1—3|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
| 40 00 00 00 | SETUP (Bulk) *1—1|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | 000a aaaa | Part1 Tx/Rx Channel
0 — 16
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(1 — 16,OFF)
0 — 16
00 01 | 000a aaaa | Part2 Tx/Rx Channel
|
|
(1 — 16,OFF)
0 — 16
00 02 | 000a aaaa | Part3 Tx/Rx Channel
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
(1 — 16,OFF)
0 — 16
| 41 00 00 00 | DRUM KIT 1
(Bulk)
(Bulk)
*1—2|
|
*1—2|
00 03 | 000a aaaa | Part4 Tx/Rx Channel
|
:
|
:
|
|
(1 — 16,OFF)
0 — 16
| 41 62 00 00 | DRUM KIT 99
00 04 | 000a aaaa | Perc Part Tx/Rx Channel
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
(1 — 16,OFF)
0 — 16
| 44 00 00 00 | dummy (ignored)
|
00 05 | 000a aaaa | Kit Part Tx/Rx Channel
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
|
|
(1 — 16,OFF)
*
1-1 SETUP
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 06 | 0000 000a | Note Chase
0 — 1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
|
|
(OFF,ON)
0 — 1
| Offset
address
|
|
|
00 07 | 0000 000a | Local Control
|
| Description
|
|
(OFF,ON)
0 — 1
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
00 08 | 0000 000a | Soft Thru
|
00 00 00 | TRIGGER
*1—1—1|
|
|
(OFF,ON)
0 — 1
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
00 09 | 0000 000a | GM Mode
|
|
|
01 00 00 | dummy (ignored)
|
|
|
|
|
(OFF,ON)
0 — 1
:
|
00 0A | 0000 000a | Rx GM On
05 00 00 |
|
|
(OFF,ON)
0 — 2
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
06 00 00 | MIDI *1—1—2|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
07 00 00 | PROGRAM CHANGE SW *1—1—3|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
08 00 00 | dummy (ignored)
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
09 00 00 | CONTROL *1—1—4|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
0A 00 00 | MASTER TUNE *1—1—5|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
0B 00 00 | dummy (ignored)
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
00 0B | 0000 00aa | Sync Mode
|
|
|
(INT,EXT,REMOTE) |
00 0C | 0000 00aa | Pedal Data Thin
0 — 2
|
|
|
|
|
(OFF,1,2)
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
|
00 0D | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored)
00 0E | 0000 0000 |
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
00 0F | 0000 000a | CH10 Priority
0 — 1
(KIT,PERC)
|
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
Total size | 00 00 00 10
|
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
*
1-1-1 TRIGGER
*
1-1-3 PROGRAM CHANGE SW
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
| Offset
address
|
|
|
| Offset
address
|
|
|
|
|
| Description
|
| Size
| Description
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | Pad parameters (1/KICK)
01 00 | dummy (ignored)
*1—1—1—1|
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | 0000 000a | Rx Program Change Sw
0 — 1
|
|
|
|
|
|
(OFF,ON)
0 — 1
(OFF,ON)
02 00 | Pad parameters (2/SNARE)
03 00 | Pad parameters (4/TOM1)
04 00 | Pad parameters (5/TOM2)
05 00 | Pad parameters (7/TOM3)
06 00 | Pad parameters (3/HI—HAT)
07 00 | Pad parameters (9/CRASH1)
08 00 | Pad parameters (10/CRASH2)
09 00 | Pad parameters (11/RIDE)
0A 00 | Pad parameters (6/AUX)
0B 00 | Pad parameters (8/TOM4)
*1—1—1—1|
*1—1—1—1|
*1—1—1—1|
*1—1—1—1|
*1—1—1—1|
*1—1—1—1|
*1—1—1—1|
*1—1—1—1|
*1—1—1—1|
*1—1—1—1|
00 01 | 0000 000a | Tx Program Change Sw
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
00 02 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored)
|
|
|
:
|
|
00 70 | 0000 0000 |
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
Total size | 00 00 00 71
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
|
|
*
1-1-4 CONTROL
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
*
1-1-1-1 TRIGGER (Pad parameters)
| Offset
address
|
|
|
|
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
|
| Size
| Description
| Offset
address
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
00 00 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored)
|
|
|
|
| Size
| Description
:
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
00 06 | 0000 0000 |
|
|
|
|
00 | 0000 aaaa | Trigger Type
0 — 11
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
00 07 | 0aaa aaaa | Preview Velocity 0 — 127
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
00 08 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored)
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(PD6,PD7/9,PD80/100,PD80R,PD120, |
|
|
KD7,KD Type,CY6,CY Type,
Other 1,Other 2,AcDrTrig)
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
01 | 0000 aaaa | Rim Sensitivity
|
|
0 — 15
(OFF, 1 — 15)
(2/SNARE only)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 09 | 0aaa aaaa | Percussion Part Level
00 0A | 0aaa aaaa | Backing Part Level
00 0B | 0000 0aaa | Mute Part
0 — 127
0 — 127
0 — 7
|
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
|
(SongDrum,SongDrm/Prc,UserDrmPart, |
Part1,Part2,Part3,Part4,Part1—4)
|
02 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored)
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
Total size | 00 00 00 0C
|
|
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
1 4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
*
1-1-5 MASTER TUNE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OD | 0aaa aaaa | HEAD | MIDI Gate Time
1 — 80
|
|
|
|
(0.1s — 8.0s, 0.1s step) |
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
0E | 0aaa aaaa | HEAD | Note Number
0F | 0000 000a | HEAD | Pad Pattern Velocity 0 — 1
0 — 127
|
|
|
|
|
| Offset
address
|
|
|
|
|
| Size
| Description
|
|
|
(OFF,ON)
0 — 127
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
10 | 0aaa aaaa | HEAD | Level
|
00 00 | 0000 aaaa | Master Tune
00 01 | 0000 bbbb | [nibbled]
00 02 | 0000 cccc |
0 — 509
|
11 | 0aaa aaaa | HEAD | Ambience Send Level 0 — 127
|#
|#
|#
(415.3 — 466.2Hz) |
|—————————————+———————————+——————+——————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
|
12 | 0000 000a | HEAD | Pitch Control
0 — 1
(OFF,ON)
|
|
00 03 | 0000 dddd |
|
|
|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|—————————————+———————————+——————+——————————————————————————————————————|
|
Total size | 00 00 00 04
|
|
13 | 0000 aaaa | RIM | Instrument
0 — 1023
(1 — 1024)
(*1) |
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
|#
|#
|#
14 | 0000 bbbb |
15 | 0000 cccc |
16 | 0000 dddd |
| [nibbled]
|
|
|
|
|
*
1-2 DRUM KIT
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
|—————————————+———————————+——————+——————————————————————————————————————|
| Offset
address
|
|
|
|
17 | 0000 aaaa | RIM | Pitch
0 — 960
(—480 — +480)
(*1) |
|
| Description
|#
|#
|#
18 | 0000 bbbb |
19 | 0000 cccc |
1A | 0000 dddd |
| [nibbled]
|
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | Common parameters
01 00 | Pad parameters (1/KICK)
02 00 | dummy (ignored)
*1—2—1|
*1—2—2|
|
|—————————————+———————————+——————+——————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
1B | 00aa aaaa | RIM | Decay
0 — 62
(—31 — +31)
(*1) |
|
03 00 | Pad parameters (2/SNARE)
04 00 | Pad parameters (4/TOM1)
05 00 | Pad parameters (5/TOM2)
06 00 | Pad parameters (7/TOM3)
07 00 | Pad parameters (3/HI—HAT)
08 00 | Pad parameters (9/CRASH1)
09 00 | Pad parameters (10/CRASH2)
0A 00 | Pad parameters (11/RIDE)
0B 00 | Pad parameters (6/AUX)
0C 00 | Pad parameters (8/TOM4)
*1—2—2|
*1—2—2|
*1—2—2|
*1—2—2|
*1—2—2|
*1—2—2|
*1—2—2|
*1—2—2|
*1—2—2|
*1—2—2|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+——————+——————————————————————————————————————|
|
1C | 0000 aaaa | RIM | Pad Pattern Number
0 — 250
(OFF,1 — 250)
(*1) |
|#
|#
|#
1D | 0000 bbbb |
1E | 0000 cccc |
1F | 0000 dddd |
| [nibbled]
|
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+——————+——————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
20 | 0aaa aaaa | RIM | MIDI Gate Time
1 — 80
(*1) |
|
|
|
(0.1s — 8.0s, 0.1s step) |
21 | 0aaa aaaa | RIM | Note Number
22 | 0000 000a | RIM | Pad Pattern Velocity 0 — 1
0 — 127
(*1) |
(*1) |
|
(*1) |
(*1) |
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
*
1-2-1 DRUM KIT (Common parameters)
|
|
|
(OFF,ON)
0 — 127
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
23 | 0aaa aaaa | RIM | Level
| Offset
address
|
|
|
|
24 | 0aaa aaaa | RIM | Ambience Send Level 0 — 127
|
| Size
| Description
|—————————————+———————————+——————+——————————————————————————————————————|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
25 | 0000 000a | RIM | Pitch Control
0 — 1
(OFF,ON)
(*1) |
|
|
|
|
00 | 0aaa aaaa | Drum Kit Name 1
32 — 127
|
|
|
|
|
|
:
|
:
|
:
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
07 | 0aaa aaaa | Drum Kit Name 8
32 — 127
|
|
26 | 00aa aaaa | Pan
0 — 32
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
(L15 — R15,RANDOM,ALTERNATE) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
08 | 0000 aaaa | Studio
1 — 9
|
|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
|
(LIVING,BATHROOM,STUDIO,GARAGE,
|
|
|
27 | 0aaa aaaa | dummy (ignore)
|
|
|
LOCKER,THEATER,CAVE,GYM,STADIUM) |
:
|
:
|
09 | 0aaa aaaa | Ambience Level
0A | 0000 00aa | Wall Type
0 — 127
0 — 2
|
|
2A | 0aaa aaaa |
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
(WOOD,PLASTER,GLASS) |
|
Total size | 00 00 00 2B
|
0B | 0000 00aa | Room Size
1 — 3
|
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
|
|
(SMALL,MEDIUM,LARGE) |
(*1) 2/ SNARE, 4/ TOM1, 3/ HIHAT, 9/ CRASH1, 10/ CRASH2, 11/ RIDE only.
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
0C | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored)
|
|
*
1-3 USER SONG
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
0D | 000a aaaa | EQ Low Gain
|
0 — 24
(—12 — +12db)
|
|
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
|
| Offset
address
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
| Description
|
0E | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored)
|
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
| 00 00 00 00 | All User Song Request
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
| 01 7F 7F 7F | All User Song Data End
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
|
|
|
0F | 000a aaaa | EQ High Gain
|
0 — 24
(—12 — +12db)
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
|
10 | 0000 000a | Ambience Sw
0 — 1
|
|
|
|
|
|
(OFF,ON)
0 — 1
11 | 0000 000a | Master EQ Sw
|
|
(OFF,ON)
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
12 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored)
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
13 | 0000 aaaa | Pedal Hi—Hat Volume
0 — 15
0 — 48
|
|
14 | 00aa aaaa | Pedal Pitch Control Range
|
|
(—24 — +24semitone) |
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
15 | 0aaa aaaa | Master Volume
0 — 127
|
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
|
16 | 0000 0000 | dummy (ignored)
|
|
|
:
|
|
18 | 0000 0000 |
|—————————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
Total size | 00 00 00 19
|
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
*
1-2-2 DRUM KIT (Pad parameters)
+———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
| Offset
address
|
|
|
|
|
| Size
| Description
|—————————————+———————————+—————————————————————————————————————————————|
|
00 | 0000 aaaa | HEAD | Instrument
0 — 1023
|
|
|
|
|#
|#
|#
01 | 0000 bbbb |
02 | 0000 cccc |
03 | 0000 dddd |
| [nibbled]
|
|
(1 — 1024)
|—————————————+———————————+——————+——————————————————————————————————————|
|
04 | 0000 aaaa | HEAD | Pitch
0 — 960
(—480 — +480)
|
|
|
|
|#
|#
|#
05 | 0000 bbbb |
06 | 0000 cccc |
07 | 0000 dddd |
| [nibbled]
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+——————+——————————————————————————————————————|
|
|
08 | 00aa aaaa | HEAD | Decay
|
0 — 62
(—31 — +31)
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+——————+——————————————————————————————————————|
|
09 | 0000 aaaa | HEAD | Pad Pattern Number
0 — 250
(OFF,1 — 250)
|
|
|
|
|#
|#
|#
0A | 0000 bbbb |
0B | 0000 cccc |
OC | 0000 dddd |
| [nibbled]
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+——————+——————————————————————————————————————|
1 4 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
■ Parameter Address Block Map
An outlined address map of the Exclusive Communication is as follows;
■ Supplementary Material
Address(H) Block
Sub block
Reference
■ Decimal and Hexadecimal table
=========== ===================
====================================
==========
00 00 00 00 +-----------------+....+---------------------+....+--------+.....+--------+
In MIDI documentation, data values and addresses/ sizes of exclusive messages etc.
| SETUP
+-----------------+.
|
| TRIGGER
+---------------------+.
|
| PAD 1
|
|*1-1-1-1|
+--------+.....+--------+
are expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
: .
.
.
|
:
|
The following table shows how these correspond to decimal numbers.
: .
: .
: .
+--------+
. | PAD 12 |
.+--------+
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
| Dec. | Hex. || Dec. | Hex. || Dec. | Hex. || Dec. | Hex. |
|——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————|
: . +---------------------+...................+--------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 | 00H ||
1 | 01H ||
2 | 02H ||
3 | 03H ||
4 | 04H ||
5 | 05H ||
6 | 06H ||
7 | 07H ||
8 | 08H ||
9 | 09H ||
10 | 0AH ||
11 | 0BH ||
12 | 0CH ||
13 | 0DH ||
14 | 0EH ||
15 | 0FH ||
16 | 10H ||
17 | 11H ||
18 | 12H ||
19 | 13H ||
20 | 14H ||
21 | 15H ||
22 | 16H ||
23 | 17H ||
24 | 18H ||
25 | 19H ||
26 | 1AH ||
27 | 1BH ||
28 | 1CH ||
29 | 1DH ||
30 | 1EH ||
31 | 1FH ||
32 | 20H ||
33 | 21H ||
34 | 22H ||
35 | 23H ||
36 | 24H ||
37 | 25H ||
38 | 26H ||
39 | 27H ||
40 | 28H ||
41 | 29H ||
42 | 2AH ||
43 | 2BH ||
44 | 2CH ||
45 | 2DH ||
46 | 2EH ||
47 | 2FH ||
48 | 30H ||
49 | 31H ||
50 | 32H ||
51 | 33H ||
52 | 34H ||
53 | 35H ||
54 | 36H ||
55 | 37H ||
56 | 38H ||
57 | 39H ||
58 | 3AH ||
59 | 3BH ||
60 | 3CH ||
61 | 3DH ||
62 | 3EH ||
63 | 3FH ||
64 | 40H ||
65 | 41H ||
66 | 42H ||
67 | 43H ||
96 | 60H |
97 | 61H |
98 | 62H |
99 | 63H |
: . | MIDI
|
| *1-1-2 |
: . +---------------------+...................+--------+
: . +---------------------+...................+--------+
: . | PROGRAM CHANGE SW
|
| *1-1-3 |
68 | 44H || 100 | 64H |
69 | 45H || 101 | 65H |
70 | 46H || 102 | 66H |
71 | 47H || 103 | 67H |
72 | 48H || 104 | 68H |
73 | 49H || 105 | 69H |
74 | 4AH || 106 | 6AH |
75 | 4BH || 107 | 6BH |
76 | 4CH || 108 | 6CH |
77 | 4DH || 109 | 6DH |
78 | 4EH || 110 | 6EH |
79 | 4FH || 111 | 6FH |
80 | 50H || 112 | 70H |
81 | 51H || 113 | 71H |
82 | 52H || 114 | 72H |
83 | 53H || 115 | 73H |
84 | 54H || 116 | 74H |
85 | 55H || 117 | 75H |
86 | 56H || 118 | 76H |
87 | 57H || 119 | 77H |
88 | 58H || 120 | 78H |
89 | 59H || 121 | 79H |
90 | 5AH || 122 | 7AH |
91 | 5BH || 123 | 7BH |
92 | 5CH || 124 | 7CH |
93 | 5DH || 125 | 7DH |
94 | 5EH || 126 | 7EH |
95 | 5FH || 127 | 7FH |
: . +---------------------+...................+--------+
: . +---------------------+...................+--------+
: . | CONTROL
|
| *1-1-4 |
: . +---------------------+...................+--------+
: . +---------------------+...................+--------+
:
:
:
. | MASTER TUNE
|
| *1-1-5 |
.+---------------------+...................+--------+
01 00 00 00 +-----------------+....+---------------------+...................+--------+
| DRUM KIT | DRUM KIT 1 | *1-2
+-----------------+. +---------------------+...................+--------+
|
|
|
:
:
:
:
:
: .
|
:
|
: . +---------------------+
:
:
:
. | DRUM KIT 99
|
.+---------------------+
10 00 00 00 +-----------------+........................
| USER SONG
|
^
+-----------------+
|
:
:
|
40 00 00 00 +-----------------+
| SETUP
+-----------------+
|
|
Bulk area
|
|
|
v
:
:
41 00 00 00 +-----------------+
| DRUM KIT
|
+-----------------+........................
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+
*
*
Decimal values such as MIDI channel, bank select, and program change are
listed as one(1) greater than the values given in the above table.
A 7-bit byte can express data in the range of 128 steps. For data where greater
precision is required, we must use two or more bytes. For example, two
hexadecimal numbers aa bbH expressing two 7-bit bytes would indicate a value
of aa x 128 + bb.
■ Bulk Dump
Bulk Dump allows you to transmit a large amount of data at once, and is
convenient for storing settings for the entire unit on a computer or sequencer.
For Bulk Dump Request, you must use the Address and Size listed in the following
Bulk Dump Request.
*
*
In the case of values which have a +- sign, 00H = -64, 40H = +- 0, and 7FH = +63,
so that the decimal expression would be 64 less than the value given in the
above chart. In the case of two types, 00 00H = -8192, 40 00H = +- 0, and 7F 7FH
= +8191. For example if aa bbH were expressed as decimal, this would be aa
bbH - 40 00H = aa x 128 + bb - 64 x 128.
■ Parameter Dump Request
Address(H)
Size(H)
10 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
(All User Songs: dump request for all user songs)
40 00 00 00
41 mm 00 00
41 7f 00 00
00 00 00 00
Data marked "nibbled" is expressed in hexadecimal in 4-bit units. A value
expressed as a 2-byte nibble 0a 0bH has the value of a x 16 + b.
(Setup: dump request for all setup except Device ID and
LCD Contrast)
00 00 00 00
<Example1> What is the decimal expression of 5AH ?
(One Drum Kit: single drum kit dump request specified by
From the preceding table, 5AH = 90
"mm")
<Example2> What is the decimal expression of the value 12 34H
given as hexadecimal for each 7 bits?
00 00 00 00
(All Drum Kits: dump request for all drum kitsÅj
mm = 00H - 62H (Drum Kit No.1 - 99)
From the preceding table, since 12H = 18 and 34H = 52
18 x 128 + 52 = 2356
*
*
Data of preset song (No.1 - 150) cannot be transmitted.
Make sure to set "00 00 00 00" for the data size.
<Example3> What is the decimal expression of the nibbled value
0A 03 09 0D ?
From the preceding table, since 0AH = 10, 03H = 3, 09H = 9, 0DH = 13
((10 x 16 + 3) x 16 + 9) x 16 + 13 = 41885
<Example4> What is the nibbled expression of the decimal value
1258 ?
16) 1258
16)
16)
78 ...10
4 ...14
0 ...4
Since from the preceding table, 0 = 00H, 4 = 04H, 14 = 0EH, 10 = 0AH , the answer
is 00 04 0E 0A
1 4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
■ Example of an Exclusive message
■ Examples of actual MIDI message
<Example1> 92 3E 5F
and calculating a Checksum
Roland Exclusive messages (RQ1, DT1) are transmitted with a checksum at the end
(before F7) to make sure that the message was correctly received. The value of the
checksum is determined by the address and data (or size) of the transmitted
exclusive message.
9n is the Note-on status, and n is the MIDI channel number. Since 2H = 2, 3EH = 62,
and 5FH = 95, this is a Note-on message with MIDI CH = 3, note number 62 (note
name is D4), and velocity 95.
<Example2> C9 20
■ How to calculate the checksum
CnH is the Program Change status, and n is the MIDI channel number. Since 9H =
9 and 20H = 32, this is a Program Change message with MIDI CH = 10, program
number 33 (Drum Kit No.33).
(hexadecimal numbers are indicated by "H")
The checksum is a value derived by adding the address, size and checksum itself
and inverting the lower 7 bits.
<Example3> E3 00 28
Heres an example of how the checksum is calculated. We will assume that in the
exclusive message we are transmitting, the address is aa bb cc ddH and the data or
size is ee ff gg hhH.
EnH is the Pitch Bend Change status, and n is the MIDI channel number. The 2nd
byte (00H=0) is the LSB and the 3rd byte (28H=40) is the MSB, but Pitch Bend Value
is a signed number in which 40 00H ( = 64 x 128 + 0 = 8192) is 0, so this Pitch Bend
Value is
aa + bb + cc + dd + ee + ff + gg + hh = sum
sum / 128 = quotient ... remainder
28 00H - 40 00H = 40 x 128 + 0 - (64 x 128 + 0) = 5120 - 8192 = -3072
128 - remainder = checksum
(However, the checksum will be 0 if the remainder is 0.)
<Example4> B3 64 00 65 00 06 0C 26 00 64 7F 65 7F
BnH is the Control Change status, and n is the MIDI channel number. For Control
Changes, the 2nd byte is the control number, and the 3rd byte is the value. In a case
in which two or more messages consecutive messages have the same status, MIDI
has a provision called "running status" which allows the status byte of the second
and following messages to be omitted. Thus, the above messages have the
following meaning.
<Example1> Setting pan of snare drum (Trigger 2) in drum kit 1 to
"ALTERNATE".
According to the "Parameter address map", the drum kit No.1 has an address of 01
00 00 00H, drum kit pad parameter of Trigger 2 has a offset address of 03 00H and
pan has a offset address of 26H. Thus,
01 00 00 00
03 00
B3 64 00
(B3) 65 00
(B3) 06 0C
(B3) 26 00
(B3) 64 7F
(B3) 65 7F
MIDI ch.4, lower byte of RPN parameter number:
(MIDI ch.4) upper byte of RPN parameter number:
(MIDI ch.4) upper byte of parameter value:
00H
00H
0CH
00H
7FH
7FH
+)
26
01 00 03 26
and "ALTERNATE" is a value of 20H,
(MIDI ch.4) lower byte of parameter value:
(MIDI ch.4) lower byte of RPN parameter number:
(MIDI ch.4) upper byte of RPN parameter number:
F0 41 10 00 3F 12
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
01 00 03 26
address
20
??
F7
data checksum (6)
(1) Exclusive status, (2) ID number (Roland), (3) Device ID (17)
(4) Model ID (TD-6), (5) Command ID (DT1), (6) EOX
In other words, the above messages specify a value of 0C 00H for RPN parameter
number 00 00H on MIDI channel 4, and then set the RPN parameter number to 7F
7FH.
Next we calculate the checksum.
RPN parameter number 00 00H is Pitch Bend Sensitivity, and the MSB of the value
indicates semitone units, so a value of 0CH = 12 sets the maximum pitch bend
range to +- 12 semitones (1 octave). (On GS sound sources the LSB of Pitch Bend
Sensitivity is ignored, but the LSB should be transmitted anyway (with a value of 0)
so that operation will be correct on any device.)
01H + 00H + 03H + 26H + 20H = 1 + 0 + 3 + 38 + 32 = 74 (sum)
74 (sum)/ 128 = 0 (quotient) ... 74 (remainder)
checksum = 128 - 74 (remainder) = 54 = 36H
This means that F0 41 10 00 3F 12 01 00 03 26 20 36 F7 is the message we transmit.
<Example2> Requesting transmission of master volume of drum
kit 1.
Once the parameter number has been specified for RPN or NRPN, all Data Entry
messages transmitted on that same channel will be valid, so after the desired value
has been transmitted, it is a good idea to set the parameter number to 7F 7FH to
prevent accidents. This is the reason for the (B3) 64 7F (B3) 65 7F at the end.
According to the "Parameter address map",the drum kit No.1 has an address of 01
00 00 00H, drum kit common parameter has a offset address of 00 00H
and master volume has a offset address of 15H. Thus,
It is not desirable for performance data (such as Standard MIDI File data) to contain
many events with running status as given in <Example 4>. This is because if
playback is halted during the song and then rewound or fast-forwarded, the
sequencer may not be able to transmit the correct status, and the sound source will
then misinterpret the data. Take care to give each event its own status.
01 00 00 00
00 00
+)
15
01 00 00 15
Since Size = 00 00 00 01H,
It is also necessary that the RPN or NRPN parameter number setting and the value
setting be done in the proper order. On some sequencers, events occurring in the
same (or consecutive) clock may be transmitted in an order different than the order
in which they were received. For this reason it is a good idea to slightly skew the
time of each event (about 1 tick for TPQN =96, and about 5 ticks for TPQN =480).
F0 41 10
(1) (2) (3)
00 3F 11
(4) (5)
01 00 00 15
address
00 00 00 01
size
??
F7
checksum (6)
(1) Exclusive status, (2) ID number (Roland), (3) Device ID (17)
(4) Model ID (TD-6), (5) Command ID (RQ1), (6) EOX
Next we calculate the checksum.
*
TPQN : Ticks Per Quarter Note
01H + 00H + 00H + 15H + 00H + 00H +00H + 01H = 1 + 0 + 0 + 21 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 =
23 (sum)
23 (sum) / 128 = 0(quotient) ... 23 (remainder)
checksum = 128 - 23 (remainder) = 105 = 69H
This means that F0 41 10 00 3F 11 01 00 00 15 00 00 00 01 69 F7 is the message we
transmit.
1 4 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n
■ About tuning
*
Tuning by sending RPN#1 is only possible in GM mode.
In MIDI, individual Parts are tuned by sending RPN #1 (Channel Fine Tuning) to
the appropriate MIDI channel.
In MIDI, an entire device is tuned by either sending RPN #1 to all MIDI channels
being used, or by sending a System Exclusive MASTER TUNE (address 00 0A 00
00H).
RPN #1 allows tuning to be specified in steps of approximately 0.012 cents (to be
precise, 100/ 8192 cent). One cent is 1/ 100th of a semitone. System Exclusive
MASTER TUNE allows tuning in steps of 0.1 Hz.
The values of RPN #1 (Channel Fine Tuning) and System Exclusive master tune are
added together to determine the actual pitch sounded by each Part.
Frequently used tuning values are given in the following table for your reference.
Values are in hexadecimal (decimal in parentheses).
+————————+————————+——————————————+—————————————————————+
|Hz in A4| cent |
RPN #1
| Sys.Ex. 00 0A 00 00 |
+————————+————————+——————————————+—————————————————————+
| 445.0 | +19.56 | 4C 43 (+1603)| 00 01 02 09 (+50) |
| 444.0 | +15.67 | 4A 03 (+1283)| 00 01 01 0F (+40) |
| 443.0 | +11.76 | 47 44 (+ 964)| 00 01 01 05 (+30) |
| 442.0 | + 7.85 | 45 03 (+ 643)| 00 01 00 0B (+20) |
| 441.0 | + 3.93 | 42 42 (+ 322)| 00 01 00 01 (+10) |
| 440.0 |
0.00 | 40 00 (
0)| 00 00 0F 07 ( 0) |
| 439.0 | — 3.94 | 3D 3D (— 323)| 00 00 0E 0D (—10) |
| 438.0 | — 7.89 | 3A 7A (— 646)| 00 00 0E 03 (—20) |
+————————+————————+——————————————+—————————————————————+
<Example> In GM mode, set the tuning of MIDI channel 3 to A4 =
442.0 Hz
Send RPN#1 to MIDI channel 3. From the above table, the value is 45 03H.
B2
64 00
65 01
06 45
26 03
64 7F
65 7F
MIDI ch.3, lower byte of RPN parameter number
(MIDI ch.3) upper byte of RPN parameter number
(MIDI ch.3) upper byte of parameter value
: 00H
: 01H
: 45H
: 03H
: 7FH
: 7FH
(B2)
(B2)
(B2)
(B2)
(B2)
(MIDI ch.3) lower byte of parameter value
(MIDI ch.3) lower byte of RPN parameter number
(MIDI ch.3) upper byte of RPN parameter number
1 4 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERCUSSION SOUND MODULE (NORMAL MODE (Expect SEQUENCER SECTION)) Date : Feb. 13, 2001
Model TD-6
MIDI Implementation Chart
Version : 1.00
Function...
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Basic
Default
1–16, OFF
1–16, OFF
Memorized (Non-Volatile)
Channel Changed
1–16, OFF
1–16, OFF
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
X
Mode 3
X
Mode
**************
**************
Note
Number :
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
True Voice
Note On
Note Off
O 9nH, v = 1–127
O 8nH, v = 64
O 9nH, v = 1–127
O 8nH, v = 64
Velocity
After
Touch
Key's
Channel's
O
X
*1
*1
O
X
*1
Pitch Bend
X
O
*3
*3
0, 32
1
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
Bank select
Modulation
Foot control
Data entry
Volume
Panpot
Expression
Hold 1
Effect 1 (Reverb Send Level)
RPN LSB, MSB
4
6
7
10
11
64
91
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
*1
*3
*2
*3
Control
Change
*3
*2
*3
100, 101
Program
Change
O
0–127
O
0–127
: True Number
Program No. 1–128
System Exclusive
O
O
: Song Position
: Song Select
: Tune Request
X
X
X
X
X
X
System
Common
System
Real Time : Commands
: Clock
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
O (120, 126, 127)
: All Sound Off
O
: Reset All Controllers
Aux
Messages
X
: Local On/Off
: All Notes Off
: Active Sensing
: System Reset
O (123–127)
O
X
* 1 Drum kit part only.
* 2 Percussion part and backing part only.
* 3 Backing part only.
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
1 4 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERCUSSION SOUND MODULE (NORMAL MODE (SEQUENCER SECTION))
Date : Feb. 13, 2001
Version : 1.00
Model TD-6
MIDI Implementation Chart
Function...
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Basic
Default
1–16, OFF
1–16, OFF
Memorized (Non-Volatile)
Channel Changed
1–16, OFF
1–16, OFF
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
X
X
X
Mode
**************
**************
Note
Number :
0–127
0–127
0–127
0–127
True Voice
Note On
Note Off
O 9nH, v = 1–127
O 8nH, v = 64
O 9nH, v = 1–127
O 8nH, v = 64
Velocity
After
Touch
Key's
Channel's
X
X
X
X
Pitch Bend
O
*3
O
*3
*1
0, 32
1
O
X
*3 *4 *5
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
Bank select
Modulation
Foot control
Data entry
Volume
Panpot
Expression
Hold 1
Effect 1 (Reverb Send Level)
RPN LSB, MSB
4
6
7
10
11
64
91
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
*1
*3
*2 *4
*3 *4
Control
Change
*3
*2 *4
*3
*3
100, 101
Program
Change
O
0–127
*4 *5
X
: True Number
Program No. 1–128
System Exclusive
O
O (do not record)
: Song Position
: Song Select
: Tune Request
X
X
X
X
X
X
System
Common
System
Real Time : Commands
: Clock
O
O
X
X
*6
*7
X
X
X
X
O
X
O
: All Sound Off
O
: Reset All Controllers
Aux
Messages
X
: Local On/Off
: All Notes Off
: Active Sensing
: System Reset
O (123–127)
O (do not record)
X
*1 Drum kit part only.
*5 Transmits when instruments are selected for parts.
Notes
*2 Percussion part and backing part only. *6 Receives when Sync Mode setting is "EXT".
*3 Backing part only.
*4 Transmits when song is selected.
*7 Receives when Sync Mode setting is
"EXT" or "REMOTE".
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
1 4 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERCUSSION SOUND MODULE (General MIDI MODE)
Date : Feb. 13, 2001
Version : 1.00
Model TD-6
MIDI Implementation Chart
Function...
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Basic
Channel Changed
Default
X
X
1–16, OFF
1–16, OFF
Memorized (Non-Volatile)
Default
Messages
Altered
X
X
Mode 3
X
Mode
**************
**************
Note
Number :
X
0–127
0–127
True Voice
**************
Note On
Note Off
X
X
O 9nH, v = 1–127
O 8nH, v = 64
Velocity
After
Touch
Key's
Channel's
X
X
X
O
*1
*1
Pitch Bend
X
O
0, 32
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Bank select
Modulation
Foot control
Data entry
Volume
Panpot
Expression
Hold 1
Effect 1 (Reverb Send Level)
RPN LSB, MSB
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
4
6
7
10
11
64
91
Control
Change
100, 101
Program
Change
X
O
0–127
: True Number
Program No. 1–128
**************
System Exclusive
O
O
: Song Position
: Song Select
: Tune Request
X
X
X
X
X
X
System
Common
System
Real Time : Commands
: Clock
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
: All Sound Off
: Reset All Controllers
Aux
Messages
: Local On/Off
: All Notes Off
: Active Sensing
: System Reset
*1 Not received on Channel 10
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
1 5 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sp e cifica tio n s
TD-6 : Pe rcu ssio n So u n d Mo d u le (Co n fo rm s to Ge n e ra l MIDI Sy ste m )
Ma x im u m Po ly p h o n y
O u tp u t Im p e d a n ce
64 Voices
1.0 k ohms
In stru m e n ts
Po w e r Su p p ly
Drum Instruments: 1,024
Backing Instruments: 262
AC Adaptor (DC 9 V)
Cu rre n t Dra w
Dru m Kits
1,000 mA
99
Dim e n sio n s
Effe ct Ty p e s
266 (W) x 199 (D) x 75 (H) mm
Ambience
10-1/ 2 (W) x 7-7/ 8 (D) x 3 (H) inches
2-Band Master Equalizer
W e ig h t
Se q u e n ce r
1.1 kg / 2 lbs 7 oz (excluding AC Adaptor)
Preset Songs: 150
User Songs: 100
Acce sso rie s
Parts: 6
Owner's Manual, AC Adaptor (ACI/ ACB Series),
Screws (M5 x 8) x 4
Play Functions: One shot, Loop, Tap
Tempo: 20–260
Resolution: 192 ticks per quarter note
Recording Method: Real-time
Maximum Note Storage: approx. 12,000 Notes
O p tio n s
Pads (PD-6, PD-7, PD-9, PD-80, PD-80R, PD-100, PD-120)
Cymbals (CY-6, CY-12H, CY-12R/ C, CY-14C, CY-15R)
Kick Trigger Units (KD-7, KD-80, KD-120)
Hi-Hat Control Pedal (FD-7)
Disp la y
20 characters, 2 lines (backlit LCD)
Stands (MDS-6, MDS-7U, MDS-8, MDS-10)
Cymbal Mount (MDY-10U)
Co n n e cto rs
Pad Mount (MDH-10U)
Trigger Input Jacks: 9 (11 Inputs)
Hi-Hat Control Jack
*
In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/
or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior
notice.
Output Jacks (L (MONO), R)
Phones Jack (stereo miniature phone type)
Mix in Jack (stereo miniature phone type)
MIDI Connectors (IN, OUT/ THRU)
1 5 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In d e x
I
M
Instrument
MIDI Implementation .......................................................... 135
Instruments
K
KIT
N
Name
O
L
Level
P
Pan
List
1 5 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In d e x
Power
S
SETUP
SONG
Program Change
Q
R
T
Tempo
Time Sig (Time Signature)
1 5 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In d e x
U
V
Volume
W
X
1 5 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
1 5 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In fo rm a tio n
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
PAN AMA
ITALY
ISRAEL
SIN GAPO RE
AFRICA
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Swee Lee Company
150 Sims Drive,
Sons Ltd.
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
LTD
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 6243-9555
N O RW AY
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (021) 492-124
JO RDAN
AMMAN Trading Agency
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
REUN IO N
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
TAIW AN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
TEL: 2273 0074
KUW AIT
Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est.
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
PO LAN D
P. P. H. Brzostowicz
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
TEL: 243-6399
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
SO UTH AFRICA
That Other Music Shop
(PTY) Ltd.
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
LEBAN O N
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,
Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857
Beirut, LEBANON
PO RTUGAL
THAILAN D
VEN EZUELA
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
Cais Das Pedras, 8/ 9-1 Dto
4050-465 PORTO
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
Musicland Digital C.A.
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
TEL: (01) 20-1441
P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
PORTUGAL
TEL: (022) 608 00 60
Q ATAR
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio
& Stores)
P.O. Box 62,
Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
VENEZUELA
TEL: (212) 285-8586
VIETN AM
Saigon Music
138 Tran Quang Khai St.,
District 1
Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: (08) 844-4068
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
RO MAN IA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
RO-4200 Gheorghehi
TEL: (095) 169-5043
EURO PE
P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
AUSTRIA
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,
1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
RUSSIA
MuTek
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
AUSTRALIA/
N EW ZEALAN D
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
ASIA
AUSTRALIA
BELGIUM/ HOLLAND/
LUXEMBO URG
Roland Benelux N. V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
CHIN A
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
SPAIN
Roland Electronics
de España, S. A.
Calle Bolivia 239, 08020
Barcelona, SPAIN
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
TEL: (93) 308 1000
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
Center
DEN MARK
SW EDEN
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District, Beijing,
CHINA
Khaled Ebn Al Walid St.
Bldg. No. 47, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
N EW ZEALAN D
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
Roland Corporation Ltd.
32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,
Auckland, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
TEL: 3916 6200
TURKEY
Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat
ve ihracat Ltd Sti
Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler
Pasaji No:74/ 20
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
FRAN CE
Roland France SA
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,
Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.
Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
CEN TRAL/ LATIN
AMERICA
SW ITZERLAN D
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
HO N G KO N G
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2499324
ARGEN TIN A
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
FIN LAN D
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
UKRAIN E
TEL: 2415 0911
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/ 108
IN DIA
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
GERMAN Y
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
UN ITED KIN GDO M
N O RTH AMERICA
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
IN DO N ESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
CAN ADA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
CO STA RICA
JUAN Bansbach
Instrumentos Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
TEL: (040) 52 60090
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
MIDDLE EAST
KO REA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
CHILE
Comercial Fancy S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
HUN GARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
TEL: (905) 362 9707
MALAYSIA
BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2144-3333
TEL: 211 005
U. S. A.
EL SALVADO R
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
OMNI MUSIC
IRELAN D
Roland Ireland
Audio House, Belmont Court,
Donnybrook, Dublin 4.
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 2603501
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo
,
PHILIPPIN ES
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
TEL: 262-0788
TEL: (323) 890 3700
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (022) 66-9426
IRAN
MOCO, INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
MEXICO
TEL: (02) 899 9801
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
TEL: (021) 285-4169
As of April 1, 2003 (Roland)
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU Countries
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is
incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Apparatus containing
Lithium batteries
Discard used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved
fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af
samme fabrikat og type.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en
ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
apparattillverkaren.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til
leverandøren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt
fabrikantens instruktion.
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av
batteri.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on
virheellisesti asennettu.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en
tilsvarende type anbefalt av
apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til
fabrikantens instruks joner.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
For EU Countries
For the USA
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
02564845
’03-5-5N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
